Updated Swedish translation for the opcodes sub-directory
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
82704155 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
82704155 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
82704155 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559machine specific performance.
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
d2ef37eb
L
762
763@item How GNU properties are merged.
764
765When linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
766.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated,
767which are reported in the link map as
768
769@smallexample
770Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
771@end smallexample
772
773It indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
774merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
775is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
776
777@smallexample
778Updated property 0xc0000002 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
779@end smallexample
780
781It indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
782when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
783is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
784@end itemize
785
786@kindex -n
787@cindex read-only text
788@cindex NMAGIC
789@kindex --nmagic
790@item -n
791@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
792Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
793libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
794mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
795
796@kindex -N
797@kindex --omagic
798@cindex read/write from cmd line
799@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 800@item -N
252b5132
RH
801@itemx --omagic
802Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
803not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
804libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
805mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
806is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
807specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
808
809@kindex --no-omagic
810@cindex OMAGIC
811@item --no-omagic
812This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
813sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
814be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
815shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
816
817@kindex -o @var{output}
818@kindex --output=@var{output}
819@cindex naming the output file
820@item -o @var{output}
821@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 822Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
823option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
824script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
825
826@kindex -O @var{level}
827@cindex generating optimized output
828@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 829If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 830the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
831should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
832option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
833the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
834no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
835of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 836
387dd777
DP
837@kindex -plugin @var{name}
838@item -plugin @var{name}
839Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
840the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
841automatically added by the complier, when using link time
842optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
843wish.
844
845Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
846from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
847@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
848those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
849copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
850based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 851just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 852
26278bb8
UD
853@kindex --push-state
854@cindex push state governing input file handling
855@item --push-state
856The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
857flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
858restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
859
860The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
861@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
862@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
863@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
864@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
865@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
866
867One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
868used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
869listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
870something as follows:
871
872@smallexample
873-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
874@end smallexample
875
876@kindex --pop-state
877@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 878@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
879Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
880flags governing input file handling.
881
a712da20
NC
882@kindex -q
883@kindex --emit-relocs
884@cindex retain relocations in final executable
885@item -q
886@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 887Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
888Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
889order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
890in larger executables.
891
dbab7a7b
NC
892This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
893
4f471f39
RS
894@kindex --force-dynamic
895@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
896@item --force-dynamic
897Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
898to VxWorks targets.
899
252b5132
RH
900@cindex partial link
901@cindex relocatable output
902@kindex -r
1049f94e 903@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 904@item -r
1049f94e 905@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 906Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 907turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
908linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
909magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
910@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 911@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
912If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
913linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
914constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
915
62bf86b4
HPN
916When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
917partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
918relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
919example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
920with input files in other formats at all.
921
252b5132
RH
922This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
923
924@kindex -R @var{file}
925@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
926@cindex symbol-only input
927@item -R @var{filename}
928@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
929Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
930relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
931to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
932programs. You may use this option more than once.
933
ff5dcc92 934For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 935followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 936the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
937
938@kindex -s
939@kindex --strip-all
940@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 941@item -s
252b5132
RH
942@itemx --strip-all
943Omit all symbol information from the output file.
944
945@kindex -S
946@kindex --strip-debug
947@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 948@item -S
252b5132
RH
949@itemx --strip-debug
950Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
951
a70f34c0
NC
952@kindex --strip-discarded
953@kindex --no-strip-discarded
954@item --strip-discarded
955@itemx --no-strip-discarded
956Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
957Enabled by default.
958
252b5132
RH
959@kindex -t
960@kindex --trace
961@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 962@item -t
252b5132 963@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
964Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
965@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
966@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
967and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
968a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
969
970@kindex -T @var{script}
971@kindex --script=@var{script}
972@cindex script files
973@item -T @var{scriptfile}
974@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
975Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 976@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 977@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
978output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
979the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
980specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
981options accumulate.
252b5132 982
14be8564
L
983@kindex -dT @var{script}
984@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
985@cindex script files
986@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
987@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
988Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
989
990This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
991processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
992command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
993@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
994behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
995command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
996the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
997@samp{gcc}).
998
252b5132
RH
999@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1000@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1001@cindex undefined symbol
1002@item -u @var{symbol}
1003@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1004Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1005symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1006modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1007different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1008option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1009
0a618243
AB
1010If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1011into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1012undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1013instead.
1014
1015@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1016@cindex symbols, require defined
1017@cindex defined symbol
1018@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1019Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1020is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1021is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1022and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1023@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1024can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1025
252b5132
RH
1026@kindex -Ur
1027@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1028@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1029For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1030@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1031turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1032@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1033It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1034with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1035be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1036@samp{-r} for the others.
1037
c005eb9e
AB
1038@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1039@cindex orphan sections
1040@cindex sections, orphan
1041@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1042Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1043specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1044
1045@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1046
1047@table @code
1048@item place
1049Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1050the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1051@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1052
1053@item discard
1054All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1055@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1056
1057@item warn
1058The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1059issue a warning.
1060
1061@item error
1062The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1063@end table
1064
1065The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1066
577a0623
AM
1067@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1068@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1069Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1070@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1071missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1072specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1073multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1074input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1075in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1076
252b5132
RH
1077@kindex -v
1078@kindex -V
1079@kindex --version
1080@cindex version
1081@item -v
1082@itemx --version
1083@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1084Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1085lists the supported emulations.
1086
1087@kindex -x
1088@kindex --discard-all
1089@cindex deleting local symbols
1090@item -x
1091@itemx --discard-all
1092Delete all local symbols.
1093
1094@kindex -X
1095@kindex --discard-locals
1096@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1097@item -X
252b5132 1098@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1099Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1100system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1101or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1102
1103@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1104@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1105@cindex symbol tracing
1106@item -y @var{symbol}
1107@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1108Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1109option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1110to prepend an underscore.
1111
1112This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1113don't know where the reference is coming from.
1114
1115@kindex -Y @var{path}
1116@item -Y @var{path}
1117Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1118for Solaris compatibility.
1119
1120@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1121@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1122The recognized keywords are:
1123@table @samp
1124
e6e2dfbd
AM
1125@item bndplt
1126Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1127
1128@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1129@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1130@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1131@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1132Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1133to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1134@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1135@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1136@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1137@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1138Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1139
cd6d6c15 1140@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1141@itemx nocombreloc
1142Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1143dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1144
b8871f35 1145@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1146@itemx nocommon
1147Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1148link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1149
1150@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1151Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1152layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1153using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1154
cd6d6c15 1155@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1156Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1157is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1158This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1159
e6e2dfbd
AM
1160@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1161@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1162Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1163if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1164by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1165@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1166may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1167selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1168these options.
1169
6aa29e7b
JJ
1170@item execstack
1171Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1172
b039ef04
L
1173@item global
1174This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1175the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1176of subsequently loaded libraries.
1177
93ab9c0d
NC
1178@item globalaudit
1179This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1180This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1181setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1182tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1183the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1184all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1185
e6e2dfbd
AM
1186@item ibtplt
1187Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1188Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1189
8df93cb5 1190@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1191Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1192to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1193Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1194
cd6d6c15
NC
1195@item initfirst
1196This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1197It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1198before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1199the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1200the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1201objects.
1202
1203@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1204Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1205so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1206libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1207
5fa222e4
AM
1208@item lazy
1209When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1210dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1211the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1212Lazy binding is the default.
1213
cd6d6c15 1214@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1215Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1216
e6e2dfbd
AM
1217@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1218Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1219
e6e2dfbd
AM
1220@item muldefs
1221Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1222
cd6d6c15 1223@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1224Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1225defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1226
1227@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1228Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1229should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1230
1231@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1232Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1233
1234@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1235Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1236
1237@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1238Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1239
6aa29e7b
JJ
1240@item noexecstack
1241Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1242
e6e2dfbd
AM
1243@item noextern-protected-data
1244Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1245library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1246used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1247generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1248module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1249i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1250
e6e2dfbd
AM
1251@item noreloc-overflow
1252Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1253relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1254overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1255
cd6d6c15
NC
1256@item now
1257When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1258dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1259when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1260function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1261called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1262
1263@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1264Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1265
6aa29e7b 1266@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1267@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1268Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1269specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1270relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1271than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1272Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1273
47acac12
L
1274@item separate-code
1275@itemx noseparate-code
1276Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1277specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1278be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1279code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1280
e6e2dfbd
AM
1281@item shstk
1282Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1283to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1284Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1285
04c3a755 1286@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1287Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1288Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1289@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1290
e6e2dfbd
AM
1291@item text
1292@itemx notext
1293@itemx textoff
1294Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1295relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1296@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1297
97a232d7
NC
1298@item undefs
1299Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1300either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1301This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1302
cd6d6c15
NC
1303@end table
1304
ece2d90e 1305Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1306
1307@kindex -(
1308@cindex groups of archives
1309@item -( @var{archives} -)
1310@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1311The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1312either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1313
1314The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1315references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1316the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1317archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1318object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1319would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1320they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1321resolved.
1322
1323Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1324it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1325more archives.
1326
69da35b5
NC
1327@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1328@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1329@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1330@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1331Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1332recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1333and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1334the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1335behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1336so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1337restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1338
4a43e768
AM
1339@kindex --as-needed
1340@kindex --no-as-needed
1341@item --as-needed
1342@itemx --no-as-needed
1343This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1344on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1345the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1346on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1347needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1348emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1349non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1350the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1351non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1352Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1353the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1354needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1355from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1356
e56f61be
L
1357@kindex --add-needed
1358@kindex --no-add-needed
1359@item --add-needed
1360@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1361These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1362their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1363options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1364and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1365
252b5132
RH
1366@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1367@item -assert @var{keyword}
1368This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1369
1370@kindex -Bdynamic
1371@kindex -dy
1372@kindex -call_shared
1373@item -Bdynamic
1374@itemx -dy
1375@itemx -call_shared
1376Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1377for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1378default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1379for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1380multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1381@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1382
a1ab1d2a
UD
1383@kindex -Bgroup
1384@item -Bgroup
1385Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1386section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1387object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1388@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1389only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1390
252b5132
RH
1391@kindex -Bstatic
1392@kindex -dn
1393@kindex -non_shared
1394@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1395@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1396@itemx -dn
1397@itemx -non_shared
1398@itemx -static
1399Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1400platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1401variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1402may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1403library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1404option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1405option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1406shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1407references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1408libraries.
252b5132
RH
1409
1410@kindex -Bsymbolic
1411@item -Bsymbolic
1412When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1413definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1414for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1415within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1416@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1417executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1418the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1419support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1420
40b36307
L
1421@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1422@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1423When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1424symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1425This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1426when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1427to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1428This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1429libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1430
55255dae
L
1431@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1432@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1433Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1434typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1435global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1436within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1437to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1438in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1439which support shared libraries.
1440
1441The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1442scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1443
40b36307
L
1444@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1445@item --dynamic-list-data
1446Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1447
1448@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1449@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1450Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1451is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1452
0b8a70d9
L
1453@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1454@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1455Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1456
252b5132
RH
1457@kindex --check-sections
1458@kindex --no-check-sections
1459@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1460@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1461Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1462been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1463perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1464suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1465allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1466restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1467Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1468force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1469option.
252b5132 1470
ddbb8a31
NC
1471@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1472@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1473@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1474@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1475This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1476by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1477command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1478output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1479input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1480specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1481follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1482behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1483
1484This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1485libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1486mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1487their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1488required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1489the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1490dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1491symbols.
1492
252b5132
RH
1493@cindex cross reference table
1494@kindex --cref
1495@item --cref
1496Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1497generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1498Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1499
1500The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1501easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1502sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1503symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1504definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1505where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1506symbol are listed.
252b5132 1507
4818e05f
AM
1508@cindex common allocation
1509@kindex --no-define-common
1510@item --no-define-common
1511This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1512The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1513@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1514
1515The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1516the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1517of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1518forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1519Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1520from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1521This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1522and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1523duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1524paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1525
7bdf4127
AB
1526@cindex group allocation in linker script
1527@cindex section groups
1528@cindex COMDAT
1529@kindex --force-group-allocation
1530@item --force-group-allocation
1531This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1532normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1533default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1534change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1535command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1536effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1537
252b5132 1538@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1539@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1540@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1541Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1542address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1543times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1544limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1545context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1546symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1547constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1548using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1549@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1550equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1551
1552@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1553@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1554@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1555@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1556@itemx --no-demangle
1557These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1558and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1559present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1560underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1561mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1562different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1563to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1564demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1565is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1566
1567@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1568@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1569@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1570@item -I@var{file}
1571@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1572Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1573generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1574linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1575doing.
1576
9b8b325a
RF
1577@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1578@item --no-dynamic-linker
1579When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1580linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1581executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1582entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1583
a70f34c0
NC
1584@kindex --embedded-relocs
1585@item --embedded-relocs
1586This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1587that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1588is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1589targets.
1590
3f0a5f17
ME
1591@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1592@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1593Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1594in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1595
7ce691ae 1596@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1597@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1598@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1599@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1600Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1601with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1602
252b5132
RH
1603@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1604@item --force-exe-suffix
1605Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1606
1607If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1608@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1609the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1610option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1611Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1612it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1613
1614@kindex --gc-sections
1615@kindex --no-gc-sections
1616@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1617@item --gc-sections
1618@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1619Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1620targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1621performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1622@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1623collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1624implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1625
d5465ba2
AM
1626@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1627examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1628symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1629command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1630referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1631libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1632referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1633the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1634relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1635@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1636
ac69cbc6 1637This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1638@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1639specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1640@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1641command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1642
c17d87de
NC
1643@kindex --print-gc-sections
1644@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1645@cindex garbage collection
1646@item --print-gc-sections
1647@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1648List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1649printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1650collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1651default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1652be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1653line.
1654
22185505 1655@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1656@cindex garbage collection
1657@item --gc-keep-exported
1658When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1659collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1660default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1661executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1662collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1663Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1664it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1665ELF format targets.
1666
30824704
RM
1667@kindex --print-output-format
1668@cindex output format
1669@item --print-output-format
1670Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1671other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1672in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1673
3604cb1f
TG
1674@kindex --print-memory-usage
1675@cindex memory usage
1676@item --print-memory-usage
1677Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1678the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1679quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1680headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1681parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1682
1683@smallexample
1684Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1685 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1686 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1687@end smallexample
1688
252b5132
RH
1689@cindex help
1690@cindex usage
1691@kindex --help
1692@item --help
1693Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1694
ea20a7da
CC
1695@kindex --target-help
1696@item --target-help
1697Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1698
2509a395
SL
1699@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1700@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1701Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1702@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1703
1704@cindex memory usage
1705@kindex --no-keep-memory
1706@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1707@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1708symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1709instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1710necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1711while linking a large executable.
1712
1713@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1714@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1715@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1716@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1717@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1718Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1719is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1720The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1721behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1722libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1723
97a232d7
NC
1724The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1725
aa713662
L
1726@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1727@kindex -z muldefs
1728@item --allow-multiple-definition
1729@itemx -z muldefs
1730Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1731report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1732first definition will be used.
1733
b79e8c78 1734@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1735@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1736@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1737@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1738Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1739This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1740determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1741shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1742how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1743
903249d7
NC
1744The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1745referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1746an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1747a shared library.
1748
1749The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1750libraries specified at link time are that:
1751
1752@itemize @bullet
1753@item
1754A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1755that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1756resolvable at load time.
1757@item
1758There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1759symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1760
1761The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1762select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1763architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1764appropriate memset function.
1765@end itemize
b79e8c78 1766
31941635
L
1767@kindex --no-undefined-version
1768@item --no-undefined-version
1769Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1770it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1771will be issued instead.
1772
3e3b46e5
PB
1773@kindex --default-symver
1774@item --default-symver
1775Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1776exported symbols.
1777
1778@kindex --default-imported-symver
1779@item --default-imported-symver
1780Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1781imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1782
252b5132
RH
1783@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1784@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1785Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1786files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1787been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1788This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1789errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1790have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1791inappropriate.
1792
fe7929ce
AM
1793@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1794@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1795Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1796library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1797
252b5132
RH
1798@kindex --no-whole-archive
1799@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1800Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1801archive files.
1802
1803@cindex output file after errors
1804@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1805@item --noinhibit-exec
1806Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1807Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1808errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1809when it issues any error whatsoever.
1810
0a9c1c8e
CD
1811@kindex -nostdlib
1812@item -nostdlib
1813Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1814command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1815(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1816
252b5132 1817@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1818@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1819@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1820@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1821file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1822@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1823object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1824object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1825should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1826usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1827name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1828list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1829command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1830this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1831@end ifclear
1832
76359541
TP
1833@kindex --out-implib
1834@item --out-implib @var{file}
1835Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1836the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1837library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1838may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1839behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1840step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1841the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1842
36af4a4e
JJ
1843@kindex -pie
1844@kindex --pic-executable
1845@item -pie
1846@itemx --pic-executable
1847@cindex position independent executables
1848Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1849ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1850libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1851address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1852normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1853defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1854
252b5132
RH
1855@kindex -qmagic
1856@item -qmagic
1857This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1858
1859@kindex -Qy
1860@item -Qy
1861This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1862
1863@kindex --relax
1864@cindex synthesizing linker
1865@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1866@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1867@item --relax
28d5f677 1868@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1869An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1870@ifset GENERIC
1871This option is only supported on a few targets.
1872@end ifset
1873@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1874@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1875@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1876@ifset XTENSA
1877@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1878@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1879@ifset M68HC11
1880@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1881@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1882@ifset NIOSII
1883@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1884@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1885@ifset POWERPC
1886@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1887@end ifset
252b5132 1888
28d5f677
NC
1889On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1890global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1891addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1892synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1893instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1894
1895On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1896debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1897@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1898This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1899family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1900@end ifset
1901
1902@ifset GENERIC
1903On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1904but ignored.
1905@end ifset
1906
28d5f677
NC
1907On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1908@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1909
252b5132
RH
1910@cindex retaining specified symbols
1911@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1912@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1913@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1914@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1915Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1916discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1917symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1918@ifset GENERIC
1919(such as VxWorks)
1920@end ifset
1921where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1922run-time memory.
1923
1924@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1925or symbols needed for relocations.
1926
1927You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1928line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1929
1930@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1931@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1932@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1933@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1934Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1935linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1936arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1937them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1938also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1939objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1940@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1941ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1942@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1943
ff5dcc92 1944The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1945SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1946@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1947runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1948options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1949gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1950file systems.
252b5132 1951
ff5dcc92 1952For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1953followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1954the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1955@end ifset
1956
1957@ifset GENERIC
1958@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1959@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1960@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1961When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1962happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1963of the input files.
1964
1965When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1966non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1967shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1968explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1969specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1970@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1971either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1972appearing multiple times.
1973
e680a6b6
NC
1974The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1975directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1976containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1977and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
197864-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1979
1980The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1981@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1982supported.
1983
28c309a2
NC
1984This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1985that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1986is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1987runtime linker would do.
1988
252b5132 1989The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1990libraries:
252b5132
RH
1991@enumerate
1992@item
ff5dcc92 1993Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1994@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1995Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1996between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1997specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1998used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1999at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2000by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2001the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2002@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2003On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2004@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2005environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2006@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2007On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2008directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2009@item
a1b8d843 2010For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2011variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2012@item
ec4eb78a
L
2013For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2014@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2015libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2016@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2017@item
252b5132
RH
2018The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2019@item
2020For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2021exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2022@end enumerate
2023
2024If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2025warning and continue with the link.
2026@end ifset
2027
2028@kindex -shared
2029@kindex -Bshareable
2030@item -shared
2031@itemx -Bshareable
2032@cindex shared libraries
2033Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2034and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2035shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2036undefined symbols in the link.
2037
252b5132 2038@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2039@item --sort-common
2040@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2041@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2042This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2043ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2044sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2045eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2046between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2047specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2048
2509a395
SL
2049@kindex --sort-section=name
2050@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2051This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2052patterns in the linker script.
2053
2509a395
SL
2054@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2055@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2056This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2057patterns in the linker script.
2058
a70f34c0
NC
2059@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2060@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2061This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2062.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2063post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2064
252b5132 2065@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2066@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2067Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2068each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2069size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2070
2071@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2072@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2073Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2074output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2075This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2076certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2077cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2078that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2079support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2080input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2081more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2082many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2083
2084@kindex --stats
2085@item --stats
2086Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2087as execution time and memory usage.
2088
2509a395 2089@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2090@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2091Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2092configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2093that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2094
a70f34c0
NC
2095@kindex --task-link
2096@item --task-link
2097This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2098file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2099
252b5132
RH
2100@kindex --traditional-format
2101@cindex traditional format
2102@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2103For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2104the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2105use the traditional format instead.
2106
2107@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2108For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2109symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2110full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2111@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2112trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2113combine duplicate entries.
2114
2509a395
SL
2115@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2116@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2117Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2118address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2119times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2120line.
2121@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2122for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2123@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2124should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2125sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2126
2509a395
SL
2127@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2128@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2129@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2130@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2131@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2132@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2133@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2134Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2135@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2136
2509a395
SL
2137@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2138@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2139@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2140When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2141byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2142
9d5777a3
RM
2143@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2144@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2145@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2146When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2147the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2148text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2149
0d705e9f
AM
2150@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2151@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2152@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2153When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2154model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2155
560e09e9
NC
2156@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2157@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2158Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2159values for @samp{method}:
2160
2161@table @samp
2162@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2163Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2164
2165@item report-all
da8bce14 2166Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2167
2168@item ignore-in-object-files
2169Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2170ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2171
2172@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2173Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2174ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2175when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2176libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2177command line.
2178@end table
2179
2180The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2181by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2182
2183Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2184unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2185can change this to a warning.
2186
1715a13c
L
2187@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2188@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2189@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2190@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2191Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2192supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2193the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2194argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2195
2196@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2197@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2198@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2199Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2200used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2201about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2202is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2203see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2204use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2205symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2206@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2207
7ce691ae 2208@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2209@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2210@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2211@item --warn-common
2212Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2213a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2214but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2215you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2216Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2217warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2218
2219There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2220
2221@table @samp
2222@item int i = 1;
2223A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2224file.
2225
2226@item extern int i;
2227An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2228There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2229variable somewhere.
2230
2231@item int i;
2232A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2233variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2234The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2235single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2236size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2237a definition of the same variable.
2238@end table
2239
2240The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2241Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2242just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2243encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2244a common symbol.
2245
2246@enumerate
2247@item
2248Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2249definition for the symbol.
2250@smallexample
2251@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2252 overridden by definition
2253@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2254@end smallexample
2255
2256@item
2257Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2258the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2259except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2260@smallexample
2261@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2262 overriding common
2263@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2264@end smallexample
2265
2266@item
2267Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2268@smallexample
2269@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2270 of `@var{symbol}'
2271@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2272@end smallexample
2273
2274@item
2275Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2276@smallexample
2277@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2278 overridden by larger common
2279@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2280@end smallexample
2281
2282@item
2283Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2284the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2285encountered in a different order.
2286@smallexample
2287@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2288 overriding smaller common
2289@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2290@end smallexample
2291@end enumerate
2292
2293@kindex --warn-constructors
2294@item --warn-constructors
2295Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2296object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2297detect the use of global constructors.
2298
2299@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2300@item --warn-multiple-gp
2301Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2302This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2303Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2304section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2305of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2306base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2307base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2308bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2309large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2310values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2311option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2312
2313@kindex --warn-once
2314@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2315@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2316@item --warn-once
2317Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2318which refers to it.
2319
2320@kindex --warn-section-align
2321@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2322@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2323@item --warn-section-align
2324Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2325alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2326The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2327is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2328the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2329
8fdd7217
NC
2330@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2331@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2332Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2333
a0c402a5
L
2334@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2335@item --warn-alternate-em
2336Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2337
560e09e9
NC
2338@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2339@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2340If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2341@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2342This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2343
2344@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2345@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2346This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2347it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2348
252b5132
RH
2349@kindex --whole-archive
2350@cindex including an entire archive
2351@item --whole-archive
2352For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2353@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2354in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2355files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2356library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2357library. This option may be used more than once.
2358
7ec229ce 2359Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2360about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2361Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2362list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2363your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2364
2509a395
SL
2365@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2366@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2367Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2368@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2369undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2370@var{symbol}.
2371
2372This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2373wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2374wishes to call the system function, it should call
2375@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2376
2377Here is a trivial example:
2378
2379@smallexample
2380void *
cc2f008e 2381__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2382@{
cc2f008e 2383 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2384 return __real_malloc (c);
2385@}
2386@end smallexample
2387
ff5dcc92 2388If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2389all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2390instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2391call the real @code{malloc} function.
2392
2393You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2394links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2395you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2396file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2397call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2398
4ea904ed
SH
2399Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2400internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2401@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2402@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2403
2404@smallexample
2405int
2406f (void)
2407@{
2408 return 123;
2409@}
2410
2411int
2412g (void)
2413@{
2414 return f();
2415@}
2416@end smallexample
2417
6406a270
SH
2418Please keep in mind that with link-time optimization (LTO) enabled, your whole
2419program may be a translation unit.
2420
6aa29e7b 2421@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2422@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2423@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2424@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2425Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2426(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2427section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2428
e41b3a13
JJ
2429@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2430@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2431Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2432generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2433if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2434
6c1439be
L
2435@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2436@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2437@item --enable-new-dtags
2438@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2439This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2440systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2441@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2442and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2443If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2444created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2445those options are only available for ELF systems.
2446
2d643429 2447@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2448@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2449Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2450close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2451time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2452increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2453value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2454
fdc90cb4
JJ
2455@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2456@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2457Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2458@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2459new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2460the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2461hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2462but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2463
0ce398f1
L
2464@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2465@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2466@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2467@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2468@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2469@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2470@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2471@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2472On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2473compressed using zlib.
2474
2475@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2476sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2477DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2478instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2479also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2480sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2481
2482The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2483@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2484
2485Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2486sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2487for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2488uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2489
2490The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2491involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2492default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2493@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2494
35835446
JR
2495@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2496@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2497This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2498linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2499for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2500about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2501
4f9c04f7 2502Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25031021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2504run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2505has been used.
2506
2507The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2508enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2509
c0065db7
RM
2510@kindex --build-id
2511@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2512@item --build-id
2513@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2514Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2515or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2516unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2517@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2518@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2519@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2520the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2521string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2522@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2523is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2524
2525The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2526that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2527unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2528to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2529file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2530string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2531
2532Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2533@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2534@end table
2535
0285c67d
NC
2536@c man end
2537
36f63dca 2538@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2539
0285c67d
NC
2540@c man begin OPTIONS
2541
ff5dcc92 2542The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2543the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2544normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2545use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2546@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2547like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2548symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2549object file).
2550
2551In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2552support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2553PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2554values by either a space or an equals sign.
2555
ff5dcc92 2556@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2557
2558@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2559@item --add-stdcall-alias
2560If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2561as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2562[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2563
2564@kindex --base-file
2565@item --base-file @var{file}
2566Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2567addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2568@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2569[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2570
2571@kindex --dll
2572@item --dll
2573Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2574@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2575file.
bb10df36 2576[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2577
88183869
DK
2578@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2579@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2580@item --enable-long-section-names
2581@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2582The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2583the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2584for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2585fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2586to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2587allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2588disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2589generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2590as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2591with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2592GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2593information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2594option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2595section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2596when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2597image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2598[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2599
252b5132
RH
2600@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2601@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2602@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2603@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2604If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2605do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2606only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2607resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2608undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2609@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2610to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2611warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2612import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2613to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2614feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2615@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2616mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2617[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2618
522f09cd
KT
2619@kindex --leading-underscore
2620@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2621@item --leading-underscore
2622@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2623For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2624in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2625disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2626
252b5132
RH
2627@cindex DLLs, creating
2628@kindex --export-all-symbols
2629@item --export-all-symbols
2630If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2631be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2632otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2633explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2634attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2635option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2636@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2637@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2638exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2639re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2640such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2641@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2642@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2643Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2644not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2645extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2646(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2647These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2648@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2649@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2650@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2651@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2652[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2653
2654@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2655@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2656Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2657exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2658[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2659
2927aaca
NC
2660@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2661@item --exclude-all-symbols
2662Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2663[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2664
252b5132
RH
2665@kindex --file-alignment
2666@item --file-alignment
2667Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2668file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2669512.
bb10df36 2670[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2671
2672@cindex heap size
2673@kindex --heap
2674@item --heap @var{reserve}
2675@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2676Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2677to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2678committed.
bb10df36 2679[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2680
2681@cindex image base
2682@kindex --image-base
2683@item --image-base @var{value}
2684Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2685the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2686is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2687your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2688other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2689for dlls.
bb10df36 2690[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2691
2692@kindex --kill-at
2693@item --kill-at
2694If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2695symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2696[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2697
26d2d8a2
BF
2698@kindex --large-address-aware
2699@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2700If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2701header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2702greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2703or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2704section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2705[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2706
f69a2f97
NC
2707@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2708@item --disable-large-address-aware
2709Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2710This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2711driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2712addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2713[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2714
252b5132
RH
2715@kindex --major-image-version
2716@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2717Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2718[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2719
2720@kindex --major-os-version
2721@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2722Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2723[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2724
2725@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2726@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2727Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2728[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2729
2730@kindex --minor-image-version
2731@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2732Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2733[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2734
2735@kindex --minor-os-version
2736@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2737Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2738[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2739
2740@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2741@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2742Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2743[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2744
2745@cindex DEF files, creating
2746@cindex DLLs, creating
2747@kindex --output-def
2748@item --output-def @var{file}
2749The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2750file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2751(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2752library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2753automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2754[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2755
b044cda1 2756@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2757@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2758@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2759@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2760Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2761@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2762By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2763for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2764execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2765[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2766
2767@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2768@item --disable-auto-image-base
2769Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2770user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2771default.
bb10df36 2772[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2773
2774@cindex DLLs, linking to
2775@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2776@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2777When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2778search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2779@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2780between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2781uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2782@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2783[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2784
2785@kindex --enable-auto-import
2786@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2787Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2788DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2789mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2790[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2791
2792The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2793feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2794
2795Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2796of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2797PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2798
e2a83dd0
NC
2799Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2800data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2801placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2802around a problem with consts that is described here:
2803http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2804
4d8907ac
DS
2805Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2806see this message:
0d888aac 2807
ece2d90e 2808"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2809documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2810
ece2d90e
NC
2811This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2812ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2813allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2814fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2815constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2816multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2817this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2818of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2819the warning, and exit.
2820
2821There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2822data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2823
2fa9fc65
NC
2824One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2825of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2826this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2827
c0065db7
RM
2828A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2829that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2830there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2831a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2832
2833@example
2834extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2835extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2836 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2837@end example
2838
2839or
2840
2841@example
2842extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2843extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2844 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2845@end example
2846
c0065db7 2847For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2848is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2849
2850@example
2851extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2852extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2853 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2854@end example
2855
c406afaf
NC
2856or
2857
2858@example
2859extern long long extern_ll;
2860extern_ll -->
2861 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2862@end example
2863
2fa9fc65 2864A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2865'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2866@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2867requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2868building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2869merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2870between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2871constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2872
2873Original:
2874@example
2875--foo.h
2876extern int arr[];
2877--foo.c
2878#include "foo.h"
2879void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2880 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2881@}
2882@end example
2883
2884Solution 1:
2885@example
2886--foo.h
2887extern int arr[];
2888--foo.c
2889#include "foo.h"
2890void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2891 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2892 volatile int *parr = arr;
2893 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2894@}
2895@end example
2896
2897Solution 2:
2898@example
2899--foo.h
2900/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2901#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2902 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2903#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2904#else
2905#define FOO_IMPORT
2906#endif
2907extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2908--foo.c
2909#include "foo.h"
2910void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2911 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2912@}
2913@end example
2914
c0065db7 2915A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2916library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2917for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2918functions).
b044cda1
CW
2919
2920@kindex --disable-auto-import
2921@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2922Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2923@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2924[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2925
2fa9fc65
NC
2926@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2927@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2928If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2929that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2930a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2931environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2932[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2933
2934@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2935@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2936Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2937[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2938
b044cda1
CW
2939@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2940@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2941Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2942[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2943
252b5132
RH
2944@kindex --section-alignment
2945@item --section-alignment
2946Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2947addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2948[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2949
2950@cindex stack size
2951@kindex --stack
2952@item --stack @var{reserve}
2953@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2954Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2955to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2956committed.
bb10df36 2957[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2958
2959@kindex --subsystem
2960@item --subsystem @var{which}
2961@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2962@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2963Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2964legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2965@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2966the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2967@var{which}.
bb10df36 2968[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2969
2f563b51
DK
2970The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2971of the PE file header:
2972[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2973
2d5c3743
NC
2974@kindex --high-entropy-va
2975@item --high-entropy-va
2976Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2977(ASLR).
2978
2f563b51
DK
2979@kindex --dynamicbase
2980@item --dynamicbase
2981The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2982randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2983Vista for i386 PE targets.
2984
2985@kindex --forceinteg
2986@item --forceinteg
2987Code integrity checks are enforced.
2988
2989@kindex --nxcompat
2990@item --nxcompat
2991The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2992This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2993
2994@kindex --no-isolation
2995@item --no-isolation
2996Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2997
2998@kindex --no-seh
2999@item --no-seh
3000The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3001this image.
3002
3003@kindex --no-bind
3004@item --no-bind
3005Do not bind this image.
3006
3007@kindex --wdmdriver
3008@item --wdmdriver
3009The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3010
2f563b51
DK
3011@kindex --tsaware
3012@item --tsaware
3013The image is Terminal Server aware.
3014
0cb112f7
CF
3015@kindex --insert-timestamp
3016@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3017@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3018Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3019as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3020other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3021will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3022same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3023can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3024that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3025identically.
252b5132
RH
3026@end table
3027
0285c67d
NC
3028@c man end
3029
ac145307
BS
3030@ifset C6X
3031@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3032
3033@c man begin OPTIONS
3034
3035The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3036libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3037all executables use an index of 0.
3038
3039@table @gcctabopt
3040
3041@kindex --dsbt-size
3042@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3043This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3044or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3045entries.
3046
3047@kindex --dsbt-index
3048@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3049This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3050to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3051executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3052@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3053
fbd9ad90
PB
3054@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3055The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3056exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3057
ac145307
BS
3058@end table
3059
3060@c man end
3061@end ifset
3062
b8891f8d
AJ
3063@ifset CSKY
3064@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3065
3066@c man begin OPTIONS
3067
3068@table @gcctabopt
3069
3070@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3071@item --branch-stub
3072This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3073sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3074usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3075can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3076the compiler or assembler.
3077
3078@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3079@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3080This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3081It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3082be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3083stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3084sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3085@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3086linker should choose suitable defaults.
3087
3088@end table
3089
3090@c man end
3091@end ifset
3092
93fd0973
SC
3093@ifset M68HC11
3094@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3095
3096@c man begin OPTIONS
3097
3098The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3099memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3100
3101@table @gcctabopt
3102
3103@kindex --no-trampoline
3104@item --no-trampoline
3105This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3106is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3107instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3108
3109@kindex --bank-window
3110@item --bank-window @var{name}
3111This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3112the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3113The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3114paging and addresses within the memory window.
3115
3116@end table
3117
3118@c man end
3119@end ifset
3120
7fb9f789
NC
3121@ifset M68K
3122@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3123
3124@c man begin OPTIONS
3125
3126The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3127when linking for 68K targets.
3128
3129@table @gcctabopt
3130
3131@kindex --got
3132@item --got=@var{type}
3133This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3134@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3135@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3136Info entry for @file{ld}.
3137
3138@end table
3139
3140@c man end
3141@end ifset
3142
833794fc
MR
3143@ifset MIPS
3144@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3145
3146@c man begin OPTIONS
3147
3148The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3149generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3150linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3151
3152@table @gcctabopt
3153
3154@kindex --insn32
3155@item --insn32
3156@kindex --no-insn32
3157@itemx --no-insn32
3158These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3159generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3160or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
316132-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3162used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3163possible.
3164
8b10b0b3
MR
3165@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3166@item --ignore-branch-isa
3167@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3168@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3169These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3170transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3171accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3172is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3173instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3174equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3175calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3176a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3177an error.
3178
833794fc
MR
3179@end table
3180
3181@c man end
3182@end ifset
3183
252b5132
RH
3184@ifset UsesEnvVars
3185@node Environment
3186@section Environment Variables
3187
0285c67d
NC
3188@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3189
560e09e9 3190You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3191@ifclear SingleFormat
3192@code{GNUTARGET},
3193@end ifclear
3194@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3195
36f63dca 3196@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3197@kindex GNUTARGET
3198@cindex default input format
3199@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3200use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3201of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3202@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3203of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3204attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3205this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3206there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3207object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3208BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3209in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3210@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3211
3212@kindex LDEMULATION
3213@cindex default emulation
3214@cindex emulation, default
3215@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3216@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3217behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3218available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3219the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3220variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3221linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3222
3223@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3224@cindex demangling, default
3225Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3226@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3227default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3228a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3229may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3230options.
3231
0285c67d
NC
3232@c man end
3233@end ifset
3234
252b5132
RH
3235@node Scripts
3236@chapter Linker Scripts
3237
3238@cindex scripts
3239@cindex linker scripts
3240@cindex command files
3241Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3242written in the linker command language.
3243
3244The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3245the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3246the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3247more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3248direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3249described below.
3250
3251The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3252yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3253linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3254to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3255such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3256
3257You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3258line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3259default linker script.
3260
3261You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3262to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3263Linker Scripts}.
3264
3265@menu
3266* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3267* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3268* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3269* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3270* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3271* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3272* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3273* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3274* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3275* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3276* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3277@end menu
3278
3279@node Basic Script Concepts
3280@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3281@cindex linker script concepts
3282We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3283describe the linker script language.
3284
3285The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3286file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3287@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3288The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3289purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3290among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3291section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3292in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3293
3294Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3295also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3296contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3297the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3298A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3299area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3300loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3301which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3302of debugging information.
3303
3304Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3305first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3306the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3307@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3308section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3309same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3310is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3311(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3312based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3313RAM address would be the VMA.
3314
3315You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3316program with the @samp{-h} option.
3317
3318Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3319@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3320has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3321information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3322will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3323static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3324referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3325
3326You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3327program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3328option.
3329
3330@node Script Format
3331@section Linker Script Format
3332@cindex linker script format
3333Linker scripts are text files.
3334
3335You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3336either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3337symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3338generally ignored.
3339
3340Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3341If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3342otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3343double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3344file name.
3345
3346You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3347@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3348to whitespace.
3349
3350@node Simple Example
3351@section Simple Linker Script Example
3352@cindex linker script example
3353@cindex example of linker script
3354Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3355
3356The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3357@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3358memory layout of the output file.
3359
3360The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3361describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3362code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3363@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3364Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3365your input files.
3366
3367For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
33680x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3369linker script which will do that:
3370@smallexample
3371SECTIONS
3372@{
3373 . = 0x10000;
3374 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3375 . = 0x8000000;
3376 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3377 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3378@}
3379@end smallexample
3380
3381You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3382followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3383descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3384
252b5132
RH
3385The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3386sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3387counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3388other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3389current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3390incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3391@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3392
3393The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3394required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3395after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3396which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3397wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3398means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3399
3400Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3401@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3402@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3403
3404The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3405the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3406at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3407output section, the value of the location counter will be
3408@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3409effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3410immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3411
3412The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3413alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3414example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3415sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3416may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3417sections.
3418
3419That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3420
3421@node Simple Commands
3422@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3423@cindex linker script simple commands
3424In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3425
3426@menu
3427* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3428* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3429@ifclear SingleFormat
3430* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3431@end ifclear
3432
4a93e180 3433* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3434* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3435@end menu
3436
3437@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3438@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3439@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3440@cindex start of execution
3441@cindex first instruction
3442@cindex entry point
3443The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3444point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3445entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3446@smallexample
3447ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3448@end smallexample
3449
3450There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3451entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3452stopping when one of them succeeds:
3453@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3454@item
252b5132 3455the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3456@item
252b5132 3457the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3458@item
3ab904c4 3459the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3460targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3461check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3462@item
252b5132 3463the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3464@item
252b5132
RH
3465The address @code{0}.
3466@end itemize
3467
3468@node File Commands
36f63dca 3469@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3470@cindex linker script file commands
3471Several linker script commands deal with files.
3472
3473@table @code
3474@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3475@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3476@cindex including a linker script
3477Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3478be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3479with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
348010 levels deep.
3481
4006703d
NS
3482You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3483@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3484
252b5132
RH
3485@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3486@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3487@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3488@cindex input files in linker scripts
3489@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3490@cindex linker script input object files
3491The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3492in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3493
3494For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3495a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3496then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3497
3498In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3499script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3500
e3f2db7f
AO
3501In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3502with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3503located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3504for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3505open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3506linker will search through the archive library search path.
3507The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3508as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3509path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3510@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3511
ff5dcc92 3512If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3513name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3514@samp{-l}.
3515
3516When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3517files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3518script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3519
3520@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3521@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3522@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3523@cindex grouping input files
3524The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3525files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3526new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3527in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3528
b717d30e
JJ
3529@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3530@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3531@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3532This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3533commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3534as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3535with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3536when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3537@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3538and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3539setting afterwards.
3540
252b5132
RH
3541@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3542@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3543@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3544The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3545@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3546@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3547Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3548precedence.
3549
3550You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3551output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3552
3553@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3554@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3555@cindex library search path in linker script
3556@cindex archive search path in linker script
3557@cindex search path in linker script
3558The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3559@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3560@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3561on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3562are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3563the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3564
3565@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3566@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3567@cindex first input file
3568The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3569that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3570though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3571when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3572first file.
3573@end table
3574
3575@ifclear SingleFormat
3576@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3577@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3578A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3579
3580@table @code
3581@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3582@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3583@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3584@cindex output file format in linker script
3585The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3586output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3587exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3588(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3589line option takes precedence.
3590
3591You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3592formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3593This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3594desired endianness.
3595
3596If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3597will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3598output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3599used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3600
3601For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3602command:
3603@smallexample
3604OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3605@end smallexample
3606This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3607@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3608option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3609format.
3610
3611@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3612@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3613@cindex input file format in linker script
3614The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3615files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3616This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3617(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3618is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3619command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3620@end table
3621@end ifclear
3622
4a93e180
NC
3623@node REGION_ALIAS
3624@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3625@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3626@cindex region alias
3627@cindex region names
3628
3629Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3630@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3631
3632@smallexample
3633REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3634@end smallexample
3635
3636The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3637memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3638to memory regions. An example follows.
3639
3640Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3641memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3642that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3643non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3644access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3645read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3646sections:
3647
3648@itemize @bullet
3649@item
3650@code{.text} program code;
3651@item
3652@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3653@item
3654@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3655@item
3656@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3657@end itemize
3658
3659The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3660part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3661output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3662systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3663@code{C}:
3664@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3665@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3666@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3667@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3668@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3669@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3670@end multitable
3671The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3672loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3673the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3674the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3675
3676The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3677includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3678memory layout:
3679@smallexample
3680INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3681
3682SECTIONS
3683 @{
3684 .text :
3685 @{
3686 *(.text)
3687 @} > REGION_TEXT
3688 .rodata :
3689 @{
3690 *(.rodata)
3691 rodata_end = .;
3692 @} > REGION_RODATA
3693 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3694 @{
3695 data_start = .;
3696 *(.data)
3697 @} > REGION_DATA
3698 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3699 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3700 .bss :
3701 @{
3702 *(.bss)
3703 @} > REGION_BSS
3704 @}
3705@end smallexample
3706
3707Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3708regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3709variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3710@table @code
3711@item A
3712Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3713@smallexample
3714MEMORY
3715 @{
3716 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3717 @}
3718
3719REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3720REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3721REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3722REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3723@end smallexample
3724@item B
3725Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3726into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3727@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3728@smallexample
3729MEMORY
3730 @{
3731 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3732 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3733 @}
3734
3735REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3736REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3737REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3738REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3739@end smallexample
3740@item C
3741Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3742@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3743initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3744system start into the @code{RAM}.
3745@smallexample
3746MEMORY
3747 @{
3748 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3749 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3750 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3751 @}
3752
3753REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3754REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3755REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3756REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3757@end smallexample
3758@end table
3759
3760It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3761@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3762necessary:
3763@smallexample
3764#include <string.h>
3765
3766extern char data_start [];
3767extern char data_size [];
3768extern char data_load_start [];
3769
3770void copy_data(void)
3771@{
3772 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3773 @{
3774 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3775 @}
3776@}
3777@end smallexample
3778
252b5132 3779@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3780@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3781There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3782
3783@table @code
3784@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3785@kindex ASSERT
3786@cindex assertion in linker script
3787Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3788with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3789
fd1c4238
NC
3790Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3791take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3792inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3793for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3794symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3795
3796@smallexample
3797 .stack :
3798 @{
3799 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3800 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3801 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3802 @}
3803@end smallexample
3804
3805will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3806PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3807can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3808
3809@smallexample
3810 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3811 .stack :
3812 @{
3813 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3814 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3815 @}
3816@end smallexample
3817
3818will work.
3819
252b5132
RH
3820@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3821@kindex EXTERN
3822@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3823Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3824symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3825modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3826each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3827command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3828
3829@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3830@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3831@cindex common allocation in linker script
3832This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3833to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3834output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3835
4818e05f
AM
3836@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3837@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3838@cindex common allocation in linker script
3839This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3840command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3841to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3842
7bdf4127
AB
3843@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3844@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3845@cindex group allocation in linker script
3846@cindex section groups
3847@cindex COMDAT
3848This command has the same effect as the
3849@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3850@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3851and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3852specified (@samp{-r}).
3853
53d25da6
AM
3854@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3855@kindex INSERT
3856@cindex insert user script into default script
3857This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3858augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3859inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3860@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3861default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3862sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3863linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3864insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3865linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3866default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3867of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3868to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3869is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3870
3871@smallexample
3872SECTIONS
3873@{
3874 OVERLAY :
3875 @{
3876 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3877 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3878 @}
3879@}
3880INSERT AFTER .text;
3881@end smallexample
3882
252b5132
RH
3883@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3884@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3885@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3886This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3887references among certain output sections.
3888
3889In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3890using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3891will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3892errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3893a function defined in the other section.
3894
3895The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3896@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3897an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3898@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3899names.
3900
cdf96953
MF
3901@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3902@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3903@cindex cross references
3904This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3905references to one section from a list of other sections.
3906
3907The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3908output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3909a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3910there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3911must never call back.
3912
3913The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3914The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3915If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3916the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3917status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3918names, not input section names.
3919
252b5132
RH
3920@ifclear SingleFormat
3921@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3922@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3923@cindex machine architecture
3924@cindex architecture
3925Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3926of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3927architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3928the @samp{-f} option.
3929@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3930
3931@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3932@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3933This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3934@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3935in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3936@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3937@end table
3938
3939@node Assignments
3940@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3941@cindex assignment in scripts
3942@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3943@cindex variables, defining
3944You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3945the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3946
3947@menu
3948* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3949* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3950* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3951* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3952* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3953@end menu
3954
3955@node Simple Assignments
3956@subsection Simple Assignments
3957
3958You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3959
3960@table @code
3961@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3962@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3963@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3964@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3965@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3966@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3967@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3968@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3969@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3970@end table
3971
3972The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3973@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3974defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3975
3976The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3977may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3978
3979The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3980
3981Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3982
3983You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3984statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3985section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3986
3987The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3988expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3989
3990Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3991assignments may be used:
3992
3993@smallexample
3994floating_point = 0;
3995SECTIONS
3996@{
3997 .text :
3998 @{
3999 *(.text)
4000 _etext = .;
4001 @}
156e34dd 4002 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4003 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4004@}
4005@end smallexample
4006@noindent
4007In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4008zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4009the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4010defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4011upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4012
eb8476a6
MR
4013@node HIDDEN
4014@subsection HIDDEN
4015@cindex HIDDEN
4016For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4017exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4018
4019Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4020@code{HIDDEN}:
4021
4022@smallexample
4023HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4024SECTIONS
4025@{
4026 .text :
4027 @{
4028 *(.text)
4029 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4030 @}
4031 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4032 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4033@}
4034@end smallexample
4035@noindent
4036In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4037
252b5132
RH
4038@node PROVIDE
4039@subsection PROVIDE
4040@cindex PROVIDE
4041In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4042only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4043the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4044@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4045@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4046@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4047@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4048@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4049
4050Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4051@smallexample
4052SECTIONS
4053@{
4054 .text :
4055 @{
4056 *(.text)
4057 _etext = .;
4058 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4059 @}
4060@}
4061@end smallexample
4062
4063In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4064underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4065the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4066underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4067If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4068linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4069
b0daac83
NC
4070Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4071defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4072that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4073when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4074@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4075
7af8e998
L
4076@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4077@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4078@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4079Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4080hidden and won't be exported.
4081
73ae6183
NC
4082@node Source Code Reference
4083@subsection Source Code Reference
4084
4085Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4086intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4087a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4088symbol that does not have a value.
4089
4090Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4091transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4092stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4093prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4094mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4095of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4096variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4097linker script variable might be referred to as:
4098
4099@smallexample
4100 extern int foo;
4101@end smallexample
4102
4103But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4104
4105@smallexample
4106 _foo = 1000;
4107@end smallexample
4108
4109In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4110transformation has taken place.
4111
4112When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4113things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4114in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4115second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4116table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4117contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4118value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4119
4120@smallexample
4121 int foo = 1000;
4122@end smallexample
4123
10bf6894 4124creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4125holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4126number 1000 is initially stored.
4127
4128When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4129first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4130memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4131So:
4132
4133@smallexample
4134 foo = 1;
4135@end smallexample
4136
4137looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4138associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4139address. Whereas:
4140
4141@smallexample
4142 int * a = & foo;
4143@end smallexample
4144
10bf6894 4145looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4146and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4147the variable @samp{a}.
4148
4149Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4150the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4151an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4152
4153@smallexample
4154 foo = 1000;
4155@end smallexample
4156
4157creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4158the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4159address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4160linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4161access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4162
4163Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4164you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4165use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4166section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4167linker script contains these declarations:
4168
4169@smallexample
4170@group
4171 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4172 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4173 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4174@end group
4175@end smallexample
4176
4177Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4178
4179@smallexample
4180@group
4181 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4182
73ae6183
NC
4183 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4184@end group
4185@end smallexample
4186
4187Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4188Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4189arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4190
4191@smallexample
4192@group
4193 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4194
4195 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4196@end group
4197@end smallexample
4198
4199Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4200operators.
73ae6183 4201
252b5132 4202@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4203@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4204@kindex SECTIONS
4205The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4206into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4207
4208The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4209@smallexample
4210SECTIONS
4211@{
4212 @var{sections-command}
4213 @var{sections-command}
4214 @dots{}
4215@}
4216@end smallexample
4217
4218Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4219
4220@itemize @bullet
4221@item
4222an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4223@item
4224a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4225@item
4226an output section description
4227@item
4228an overlay description
4229@end itemize
4230
4231The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4232@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4233those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4234understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4235the layout of the output file.
4236
4237Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4238below.
4239
4240If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4241linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4242section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4243input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4244example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4245in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4246
4247@menu
4248* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4249* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4250* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4251* Input Section:: Input section description
4252* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4253* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4254* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4255* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4256* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4257@end menu
4258
4259@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4260@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4261The full description of an output section looks like this:
4262@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4263@group
7e7d5768 4264@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4265 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4266 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4267 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4268 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4269 @{
4270 @var{output-section-command}
4271 @var{output-section-command}
4272 @dots{}
abc9061b 4273 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4274@end group
4275@end smallexample
4276
4277Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4278
4279The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4280name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4281The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4282the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4283The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4284
4285Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4286
4287@itemize @bullet
4288@item
4289a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4290@item
4291an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4292@item
4293data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4294@item
4295a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4296@end itemize
4297
4298@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4299@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4300@cindex name, section
4301@cindex section name
4302The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4303meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4304support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4305must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4306example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4307output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4308names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4309quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4310characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4311commas must be quoted.
4312
4313The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4314Discarding}.
4315
4316@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4317@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4318@cindex address, section
4319@cindex section address
4320The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4321address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4322is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4323
4324If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4325section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4326to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4327alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4328contained within the output section.
4329
4330The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4331
4332@itemize @bullet
4333@item
4334If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4335is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4336in that region.
4337
4338@item
4339If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4340regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4341section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4342be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4343
4344@item
4345If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4346the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4347counter.
4348@end itemize
4349
4350@noindent
4351For example:
4352
252b5132
RH
4353@smallexample
4354.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4355@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4356
252b5132
RH
4357@noindent
4358and
ea5cae92 4359
252b5132
RH
4360@smallexample
4361.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4362@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4363
252b5132
RH
4364@noindent
4365are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4366@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4367counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4368counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4369input sections.
252b5132
RH
4370
4371The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4372For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4373so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4374do something like this:
4375@smallexample
4376.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4377@end smallexample
4378@noindent
4379This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4380aligned upward to the specified value.
4381
4382Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4383location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4384sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4385
4386@node Input Section
36f63dca 4387@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4388@cindex input sections
4389@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4390The most common output section command is an input section description.
4391
4392The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4393You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4394in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4395map the input files into your memory layout.
4396
4397@menu
4398* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4399* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4400* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4401* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4402* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4403@end menu
4404
4405@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4406@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4407@cindex input section basics
4408An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4409by a list of section names in parentheses.
4410
4411The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4412describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4413
4414The most common input section description is to include all input
4415sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4416include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4417@smallexample
4418*(.text)
4419@end smallexample
4420@noindent
18625d54 4421Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4422@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4423of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4424match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4425example:
252b5132 4426@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4427EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4428@end smallexample
4429@noindent
4430will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4431and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4432placed inside the section list, for example:
4433@smallexample
b4346c09 4434*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4435@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4436@noindent
4437The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4438two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4439more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4440
4441There are two ways to include more than one section:
4442@smallexample
4443*(.text .rdata)
4444*(.text) *(.rdata)
4445@end smallexample
4446@noindent
4447The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4448@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4449first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4450they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4451@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4452@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4453
8f1732fc
AB
4454When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4455is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4456immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4457@smallexample
4458*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4459@end smallexample
4460@noindent
4461will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4462@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4463from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4464exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4465could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4466@smallexample
4467*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4468@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4469@noindent
4470Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4471before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4472all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4473@smallexample
4474EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4475@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4476
252b5132
RH
4477You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4478You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4479needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4480@smallexample
4481data.o(.data)
4482@end smallexample
4483
ae17ab41
CM
4484To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4485of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4486
4487Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4488
4489@smallexample
4490@group
4491SECTIONS @{
4492 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4493 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4494@}
4495@end group
4496@end smallexample
4497
4498In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4499input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4500@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4501@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4502whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4503
967928e9
AM
4504You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4505matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4506with no whitespace around the colon.
4507
4508@table @samp
4509@item archive:file
4510matches file within archive
4511@item archive:
4512matches the whole archive
4513@item :file
4514matches file but not one in an archive
4515@end table
4516
4517Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4518wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4519single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4520@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4521within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4522also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4523other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4524from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4525command.
4526
252b5132
RH
4527If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4528the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4529commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4530@smallexample
4531data.o
4532@end smallexample
4533
967928e9
AM
4534When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4535and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4536characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4537name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4538did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4539though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4540@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4541the archive search path.
4542
4543@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4544@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4545@cindex input section wildcards
4546@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4547@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4548@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4549In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4550name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4551
4552The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4553pattern for the file name.
4554
4555The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4556
4557@table @samp
4558@item *
4559matches any number of characters
4560@item ?
4561matches any single character
4562@item [@var{chars}]
4563matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4564character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4565@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4566@item \
4567quotes the following character
4568@end table
4569
4570When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4571will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4572Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4573exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4574@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4575a @samp{/} character.
4576
4577File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4578specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4579does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4580
4581If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4582appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4583will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4584sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4585@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4586@smallexample
4587.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4588.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4589@end smallexample
4590
bcaa7b3e 4591@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4592Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4593in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4594this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4595pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4596@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4597into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4598
bcaa7b3e
L
4599@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4600@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4601difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4602descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4603Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4604reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4605
02ecc8e9
L
4606@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4607@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4608difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4609ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4610encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4611
bcaa7b3e
L
4612@cindex SORT
4613@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4614
4615When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4616can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4617
4618@enumerate
4619@item
4620@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4621It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4622sections have the same name.
4623@item
4624@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4625It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4626sections have the same alignment.
4627@item
c0065db7 4628@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4629treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4630@item
4631@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4632is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4633@item
4634All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4635@end enumerate
4636
a05a5b64 4637When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4638section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4639takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4640
4641If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4642command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4643treated as nested sorting command.
4644
4645@enumerate
4646@item
4647@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4648@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4649@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4650@item
4651@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4652@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4653@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4654@end enumerate
4655
4656If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4657command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4658
eda680f8 4659@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4660@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4661section sorting option.
4662
252b5132
RH
4663If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4664@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4665precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4666
4667This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4668files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4669sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4670The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4671with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4672linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4673@smallexample
4674@group
4675SECTIONS @{
4676 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4677 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4678 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4679 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4680@}
4681@end group
4682@end smallexample
4683
4684@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4685@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4686@cindex common symbol placement
4687@cindex uninitialized data placement
4688A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4689file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4690linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4691named @samp{COMMON}.
4692
4693You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4694other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4695particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4696input files are placed in another section.
4697
4698In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4699@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4700@smallexample
4701.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4702@end smallexample
4703
4704@cindex scommon section
4705@cindex small common symbols
4706Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4707example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4708symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4709different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4710the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4711symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4712to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4713locations.
4714
4715@cindex [COMMON]
4716You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4717notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4718@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4719
4720@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4721@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4722@cindex KEEP
4723@cindex garbage collection
4724When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4725it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4726This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4727with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4728@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4729
4730@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4731@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4732The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4733to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4734start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4735@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4736follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4737@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4738@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4739All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4740files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4741
4742@smallexample
4743@group
4744SECTIONS @{
4745 outputa 0x10000 :
4746 @{
4747 all.o
4748 foo.o (.input1)
4749 @}
36f63dca
NC
4750@end group
4751@group
252b5132
RH
4752 outputb :
4753 @{
4754 foo.o (.input2)
4755 foo1.o (.input1)
4756 @}
36f63dca
NC
4757@end group
4758@group
252b5132
RH
4759 outputc :
4760 @{
4761 *(.input1)
4762 *(.input2)
4763 @}
4764@}
4765@end group
a1ab1d2a 4766@end smallexample
252b5132 4767
cbd0eecf
L
4768If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4769and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4770automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4771__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4772indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4773respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4774C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4775
252b5132 4776@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4777@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4778@cindex data
4779@cindex section data
4780@cindex output section data
4781@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4782@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4783@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4784@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4785@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4786You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4787@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4788an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4789parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4790value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4791counter.
4792
4793The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4794store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4795bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4796stored.
4797
4798For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4799of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4800@smallexample
4801BYTE(1)
4802LONG(addr)
4803@end smallexample
4804
4805When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4806same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4807target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4808@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4809@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4810
4811If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4812which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4813When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4814true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4815endianness of the first input object file.
4816
36f63dca 4817Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4818between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4819@smallexample
4820SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4821@end smallexample
4822whereas this will work:
4823@smallexample
4824SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4825@end smallexample
4826
252b5132
RH
4827@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4828@cindex holes, filling
4829@cindex unspecified memory
4830You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4831current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4832otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4833gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4834with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4835necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4836point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4837than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4838different parts of an output section.
4839
4840This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4841value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4842@smallexample
563e308f 4843FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4844@end smallexample
4845
4846The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4847section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4848part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4849entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4850precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4851expression.
252b5132
RH
4852
4853@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4854@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4855There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4856commands.
4857
4858@table @code
4859@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4860@cindex input filename symbols
4861@cindex filename symbols
4862@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4863The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4864The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4865file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4866the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4867
4868This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4869normally used for any other object file format.
4870
4871@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4872@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4873@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4874@item CONSTRUCTORS
4875When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4876unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4877destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4878arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4879automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4880For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4881linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4882@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4883ignored for other object file formats.
4884
4885The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4886constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4887Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4888the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4889first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4890of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4891compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4892formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4893@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4894the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4895destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4896@code{exit}.
4897
4898For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4899arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4900addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4901and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4902linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4903runtime code expects to see.
4904
4905@smallexample
4906 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4907 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4908 *(.ctors)
4909 LONG(0)
4910 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4911 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4912 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4913 *(.dtors)
4914 LONG(0)
4915 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4916@end smallexample
4917
4918If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4919which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4920are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4921are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4922command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4923@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4924@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4925@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4926
4927Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4928and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4929need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4930scripts.
4931
4932@end table
4933
4934@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4935@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4936@cindex discarding sections
4937@cindex sections, discarding
4938@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4939The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4940This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4941may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4942@smallexample
49c13adb 4943.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4944@end smallexample
4945@noindent
4946will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4947@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4948sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4949space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4950too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4951space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4952@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4953@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4954This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4955
a0976ea4 4956The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4957on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4958symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4959the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4960section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4961
4962@cindex /DISCARD/
4963The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4964input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4965section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4966
4967@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4968@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4969@cindex output section attributes
4970We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4971like this:
0c71d759 4972
252b5132 4973@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4974@group
7e7d5768 4975@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4976 [AT(@var{lma})]
4977 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4978 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4979 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4980 @{
4981 @var{output-section-command}
4982 @var{output-section-command}
4983 @dots{}
562d3460 4984 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4985@end group
4986@end smallexample
0c71d759 4987
252b5132
RH
4988We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4989@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4990remaining section attributes.
4991
a1ab1d2a 4992@menu
252b5132
RH
4993* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4994* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4995* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4996* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4997* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4998* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4999* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5000* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5001@end menu
5002
5003@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5004@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5005Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5006parentheses. The following types are defined:
5007
5008@table @code
5009@item NOLOAD
5010The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5011loaded into memory when the program is run.
5012@item DSECT
5013@itemx COPY
5014@itemx INFO
5015@itemx OVERLAY
5016These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5017rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5018marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5019section when the program is run.
5020@end table
5021
5022@kindex NOLOAD
5023@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5024@cindex loading, preventing
5025The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5026the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5027the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5028@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5029need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5030@smallexample
5031@group
5032SECTIONS @{
5033 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5034 @dots{}
5035@}
5036@end group
5037@end smallexample
5038
5039@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5040@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5041@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5042@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5043@cindex load address
5044@cindex section load address
5045Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5046@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5047@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5048specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5049address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5050
ea5cae92
NC
5051The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5052specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5053takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5054load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5055region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5056
5057If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5058section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5059load address:
5060
5061@itemize @bullet
5062@item
5063If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5064the LMA address as well.
5065
5066@item
5067If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5068
5069@item
5070Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5071with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5072section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5073VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5074the last section in the located region.
5075
5076@item
5077If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5078that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5079
5080@item
5081If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5082section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5083@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5084
5085@cindex ROM initialized data
5086@cindex initialized data in ROM
5087This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5088example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5089called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5090@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5091even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5092uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5093defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5094counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5095
5096@smallexample
5097@group
5098SECTIONS
5099 @{
5100 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5101 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5102 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5103 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5104 .bss 0x3000 :
5105 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5106@}
5107@end group
5108@end smallexample
5109
5110The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5111this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5112the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5113how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5114script.
5115
5116@smallexample
5117@group
5118extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5119char *src = &_etext;
5120char *dst = &_data;
5121
ea5cae92
NC
5122/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5123while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5124 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5125
ea5cae92 5126/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5127for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5128 *dst = 0;
5129@end group
5130@end smallexample
5131
bbf115d3
L
5132@node Forced Output Alignment
5133@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5134@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5135@cindex forcing output section alignment
5136@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5137You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5138alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5139intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5140
7e7d5768
AM
5141@node Forced Input Alignment
5142@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5143@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5144@cindex forcing input section alignment
5145@cindex input section alignment
5146You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5147SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5148sections, whether larger or smaller.
5149
0c71d759
NC
5150@node Output Section Constraint
5151@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5152@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5153@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5154@cindex constraints on output sections
5155You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5156of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5157read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5158@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5159
252b5132 5160@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5161@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5162@kindex >@var{region}
5163@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5164@cindex memory regions and sections
5165You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5166using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5167
5168Here is a simple example:
5169@smallexample
5170@group
5171MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5172SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5173@end group
5174@end smallexample
5175
5176@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5177@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5178@kindex :@var{phdr}
5179@cindex section, assigning to program header
5180@cindex program headers and sections
5181You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5182using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5183one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5184assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5185@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5186linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5187
5188Here is a simple example:
5189@smallexample
5190@group
5191PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5192SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5193@end group
5194@end smallexample
5195
5196@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5197@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5198@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5199@cindex section fill pattern
5200@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5201You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5202@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5203(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5204within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5205alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5206necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5207of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5208an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5209fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5210other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5211pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5212expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5213
5214You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5215output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5216
5217Here is a simple example:
5218@smallexample
5219@group
563e308f 5220SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5221@end group
5222@end smallexample
5223
5224@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5225@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5226@kindex OVERLAY
5227@cindex overlays
5228An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5229are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5230the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5231copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5232required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5233can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5234than another.
5235
5236Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5237@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5238output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5239command is as follows:
5240@smallexample
5241@group
5242OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5243 @{
5244 @var{secname1}
5245 @{
5246 @var{output-section-command}
5247 @var{output-section-command}
5248 @dots{}
5249 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5250 @var{secname2}
5251 @{
5252 @var{output-section-command}
5253 @var{output-section-command}
5254 @dots{}
5255 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5256 @dots{}
abc9061b 5257 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5258@end group
5259@end smallexample
5260
5261Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5262section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5263section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5264those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5265except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5266sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5267
abc9061b
CC
5268The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5269the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5270
252b5132
RH
5271The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5272addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5273memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5274whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5275and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5276and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5277
56dd11f0
NC
5278If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5279references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5280the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5281sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5282@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5283
5284For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5285provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5286defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5287@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5288the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5289within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5290symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5291
5292At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5293the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5294
5295Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5296@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5297@smallexample
5298@group
5299 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5300 @{
5301 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5302 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5303 @}
5304@end group
5305@end smallexample
5306@noindent
5307This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5308address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5309@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5310following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5311@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5312@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5313
5314C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5315like the following.
5316
5317@smallexample
5318@group
5319 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5320 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5321 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5322@end group
5323@end smallexample
5324
5325Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5326everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5327example could have been written identically as follows.
5328
5329@smallexample
5330@group
5331 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5332 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5333 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5334 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5335 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5336 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5337 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5338@end group
5339@end smallexample
5340
5341@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5342@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5343@kindex MEMORY
5344@cindex memory regions
5345@cindex regions of memory
5346@cindex allocating memory
5347@cindex discontinuous memory
5348The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5349memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5350
5351The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5352memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5353may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5354can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5355set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5356regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5357around to fit into the available regions.
5358
127fcdff
AB
5359A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5360however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5361specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5362@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5363@smallexample
5364@group
a1ab1d2a 5365MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5366 @{
5367 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5368 @dots{}
5369 @}
5370@end group
5371@end smallexample
5372
5373The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5374region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5375Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5376with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5377must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5378add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5379command.
252b5132
RH
5380
5381@cindex memory region attributes
5382The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5383whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5384not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5385@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5386section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5387the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5388them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5389
5390The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5391@table @samp
5392@item R
5393Read-only section
5394@item W
5395Read/write section
5396@item X
5397Executable section
5398@item A
5399Allocatable section
5400@item I
5401Initialized section
5402@item L
5403Same as @samp{I}
5404@item !
c09e9a8c 5405Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5406@end table
5407
81c688d5 5408If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5409@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5410attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5411unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5412not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5413string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5414or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5415the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5416
5417@kindex ORIGIN =
5418@kindex o =
5419@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5420The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5421the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5422cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5423abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5424@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5425
5426@kindex LENGTH =
5427@kindex len =
5428@kindex l =
5429The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5430region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5431be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5432@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5433
5434In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5435available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5436and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5437linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5438is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5439or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5440explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5441region.
5442
5443@smallexample
5444@group
a1ab1d2a 5445MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5446 @{
5447 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5448 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5449 @}
5450@end group
5451@end smallexample
5452
5453Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5454specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5455@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5456a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5457output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5458was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5459the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5460output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5461region, the linker will issue an error message.
5462
3ec57632 5463It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5464expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5465@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5466
5467@smallexample
5468@group
c0065db7 5469 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5470@end group
5471@end smallexample
5472
252b5132
RH
5473@node PHDRS
5474@section PHDRS Command
5475@kindex PHDRS
5476@cindex program headers
5477@cindex ELF program headers
5478@cindex program segments
5479@cindex segments, ELF
5480The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5481@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5482loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5483program with the @samp{-p} option.
5484
5485When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5486reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5487program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5488This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5489interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5490
5491The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5492in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5493precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5494the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5495not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5496
5497The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5498generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5499ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5500
5501This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5502@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5503
5504@smallexample
5505@group
5506PHDRS
5507@{
5508 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5509 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5510@}
5511@end group
5512@end smallexample
5513
5514The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5515of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5516header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5517with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5518must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5519is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5520
5521Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5522system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5523specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5524sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5525attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5526Section Phdr}.
5527
5528It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5529merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5530repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5531contain the section.
5532
5533If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5534then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5535not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5536convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5537placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5538default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5539segment at all.
5540
5541@kindex FILEHDR
5542@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5543You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5544the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5545The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5546file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5547include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5548segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5549these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5550
5551The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5552value of the keyword.
5553
5554@table @asis
5555@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5556Indicates an unused program header.
5557
5558@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5559Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5560the file.
5561
5562@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5563Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5564
5565@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5566Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5567found.
5568
5569@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5570Indicates a segment holding note information.
5571
5572@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5573A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5574ABI.
5575
5576@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5577Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5578
1a9ccd70
NC
5579@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5580Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5581
252b5132
RH
5582@item @var{expression}
5583An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5584be used for types not defined above.
5585@end table
5586
5587You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5588in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5589@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5590Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5591output section attribute.
5592
5593The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5594which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5595explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5596an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5597header.
5598
5599Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5600headers used on a native ELF system.
5601
5602@example
5603@group
5604PHDRS
5605@{
5606 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5607 interp PT_INTERP ;
5608 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5609 data PT_LOAD ;
5610 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5611@}
5612
5613SECTIONS
5614@{
5615 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5616 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5617 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5618 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5619 @dots{}
5620 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5621 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5622 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5623 @dots{}
5624@}
5625@end group
5626@end example
5627
5628@node VERSION
5629@section VERSION Command
5630@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5631@cindex symbol versions
5632@cindex version script
5633@cindex versions of symbols
5634The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5635only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5636symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5637a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5638shared library.
5639
5640You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5641you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5642also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5643
5644The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5645@smallexample
5646VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5647@end smallexample
5648
5649The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5650Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5651version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5652version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5653version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5654scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5655library.
5656
5657The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5658examples.
5659
5660@smallexample
5661VERS_1.1 @{
5662 global:
5663 foo1;
5664 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5665 old*;
5666 original*;
5667 new*;
252b5132
RH
5668@};
5669
5670VERS_1.2 @{
5671 foo2;
5672@} VERS_1.1;
5673
5674VERS_2.0 @{
5675 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5676 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5677 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5678 "f(int, double)";
5679 @};
252b5132
RH
5680@} VERS_1.2;
5681@end smallexample
5682
5683This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5684version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5685The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5686a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5687of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5688symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5689is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5690in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5691However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5692name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5693
5694Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5695depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5696to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5697
5698Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5699depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5700and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5701
5702When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5703specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5704unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5705unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5706somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5707wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5708wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5709set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5710ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5711
5712The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5713they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5714could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5715However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5716
0f6bf451 5717Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5718in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5719symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5720won't.
5721
5722@smallexample
7c9c73be 5723@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5724@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5725
252b5132
RH
5726When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5727symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5728requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5729shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5730loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5731linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5732application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5733way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5734all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5735search for each symbol reference.
5736
5737The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5738doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5739that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5740functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5741the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5742required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5743that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5744versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5745the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5746
5747There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5748first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5749source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5750script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5751maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5752@smallexample
5753__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5754@end smallexample
5755@noindent
5756in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5757be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5758The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5759@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5760takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5761
5762The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5763function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5764an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5765version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5766linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5767
5768To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5769source file. Here is an example:
5770
5771@smallexample
5772__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5773__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5774__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5775__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5776@end smallexample
5777
5778In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5779unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5780example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5781@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5782
5783When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5784some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5785this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5786@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5787declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5788you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5789
5790If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5791within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5792(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5793specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5794
cb840a31
L
5795You can also specify the language in the version script:
5796
5797@smallexample
5798VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5799@end smallexample
5800
c0065db7 5801The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5802The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5803demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5804patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5805@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5806
86043bbb
MM
5807Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5808described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5809or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5810the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5811whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5812cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5813might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5814should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5815expect when you upgrade.
5816
252b5132
RH
5817@node Expressions
5818@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5819@cindex expressions
5820@cindex arithmetic
5821The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5822that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5823expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5824host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5825
5826You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5827
5828The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5829expressions.
5830
5831@menu
5832* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5833* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5834* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5835* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5836* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5837* Operators:: Operators
5838* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5839* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5840* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5841@end menu
5842
5843@node Constants
5844@subsection Constants
5845@cindex integer notation
5846@cindex constants in linker scripts
5847All constants are integers.
5848
5849As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5850octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5851hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5852@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5853@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5854value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5855
5856@cindex scaled integers
5857@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5858@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5859@cindex suffixes for integers
5860@cindex integer suffixes
5861In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5862constant by
5863@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5864@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5865@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5866@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5867@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5868@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5869@tex
5870${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5871@end tex
5872@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5873respectively. For example, the following
5874all refer to the same quantity:
5875
252b5132 5876@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5877_fourk_1 = 4K;
5878_fourk_2 = 4096;
5879_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5880_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5881@end smallexample
5882
8a308ae8
NC
5883Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5884conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5885
0c71d759
NC
5886@node Symbolic Constants
5887@subsection Symbolic Constants
5888@cindex symbolic constants
5889@kindex CONSTANT
5890It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5891the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5892
5893@table @code
5894@item MAXPAGESIZE
5895@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5896The target's maximum page size.
5897
5898@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5899@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5900The target's default page size.
5901@end table
5902
5903So for example:
5904
5905@smallexample
9d5777a3 5906 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5907@end smallexample
5908
5909will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5910supported by the target.
5911
252b5132
RH
5912@node Symbols
5913@subsection Symbol Names
5914@cindex symbol names
5915@cindex names
5916@cindex quoted symbol names
5917@kindex "
5918Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5919and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5920Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5921specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5922keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5923@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5924"SECTION" = 9;
5925"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5926@end smallexample
5927
5928Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5929to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5930whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5931
ecca9871
L
5932@node Orphan Sections
5933@subsection Orphan Sections
5934@cindex orphan
5935Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5936are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5937script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5938output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5939in which to place the orphaned input section.
5940
5941If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5942an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5943placed at the end of that output section.
5944
5945If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5946sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5947name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5948orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5949one new output section.
5950
5951If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5952then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5953in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5954linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5955attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5956sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5957support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5958
a05a5b64
TP
5959The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5960(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
5961output sections an orphan is placed in.
5962
252b5132
RH
5963@node Location Counter
5964@subsection The Location Counter
5965@kindex .
5966@cindex dot
5967@cindex location counter
5968@cindex current output location
5969The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5970current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5971location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5972within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5973anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5974
5975@cindex holes
5976Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5977moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5978location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5979and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5980doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5981
5982@smallexample
5983SECTIONS
5984@{
5985 output :
5986 @{
5987 file1(.text)
5988 . = . + 1000;
5989 file2(.text)
5990 . += 1000;
5991 file3(.text)
563e308f 5992 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5993@}
5994@end smallexample
5995@noindent
5996In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5997located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5998followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5999@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6000@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6001specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6002
5c6bbab8
NC
6003@cindex dot inside sections
6004Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6005current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6006statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6007absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6008however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6009not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6010
6011@smallexample
6012SECTIONS
6013@{
6014 . = 0x100
6015 .text: @{
6016 *(.text)
6017 . = 0x200
6018 @}
6019 . = 0x500
6020 .data: @{
6021 *(.data)
6022 . += 0x600
6023 @}
6024@}
6025@end smallexample
6026
6027The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6028and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6029the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6030much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6031move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6032and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6033the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6034the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6035
b5666f2f
AM
6036@cindex dot outside sections
6037Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6038output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6039needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6040
6041@smallexample
6042SECTIONS
6043@{
6044 start_of_text = . ;
6045 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6046 end_of_text = . ;
6047
6048 start_of_data = . ;
6049 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6050 end_of_data = . ;
6051@}
6052@end smallexample
6053
6054If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6055not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6056between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6057should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6058blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6059the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6060sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6061statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6062special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6063place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6064as follows:
6065
6066@smallexample
6067SECTIONS
6068@{
6069 start_of_text = . ;
6070 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6071 end_of_text = . ;
6072
6073 start_of_data = . ;
6074 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6075 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6076 end_of_data = . ;
6077@}
6078@end smallexample
6079
6080This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6081@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6082placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6083assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6084a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6085section. So you could write:
6086
6087@smallexample
6088SECTIONS
6089@{
6090 start_of_text = . ;
6091 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6092 end_of_text = . ;
6093
6094 . = . ;
6095 start_of_data = . ;
6096 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6097 end_of_data = . ;
6098@}
6099@end smallexample
6100
6101Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6102@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6103
252b5132
RH
6104@need 2000
6105@node Operators
6106@subsection Operators
6107@cindex operators for arithmetic
6108@cindex arithmetic operators
6109@cindex precedence in expressions
6110The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6111the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6112@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6113@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6114@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6115@smallexample
6116precedence associativity Operators Notes
6117(highest)
61181 left ! - ~ (1)
61192 left * / %
61203 left + -
61214 left >> <<
61225 left == != > < <= >=
61236 left &
61247 left |
61258 left &&
61269 left ||
612710 right ? :
612811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6129(lowest)
6130@end smallexample
6131Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6132(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6133(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6134@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6135@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6136@tex
6137\vskip \baselineskip
6138%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6139\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6140\hrule
6141\halign
6142{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6143height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6144&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6145height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6146\noalign{\hrule}
6147height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6148&highest&&&&&\cr
6149% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6150&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6151&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6152&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6153&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6154&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6155&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6156&7&&left&&|&\cr
6157&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6158&9&&left&&||&\cr
6159&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6160&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6161&lowest&&&&&\cr
6162height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6163\hrule}
6164@end tex
6165@iftex
6166{
6167@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6168@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6169@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6170}
6171@end iftex
6172@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6173
6174@node Evaluation
6175@subsection Evaluation
6176@cindex lazy evaluation
6177@cindex expression evaluation order
6178The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6179an expression when absolutely necessary.
6180
6181The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6182address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6183regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6184as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6185
6186However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6187until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6188other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6189for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6190
6191The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6192assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6193allocation.
6194
6195Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6196@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6197
6198If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6199available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6200following
6201@smallexample
6202@group
6203SECTIONS
6204 @{
a1ab1d2a 6205 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6206 @{ *(.text) @}
6207 @}
6208@end group
6209@end smallexample
6210@noindent
6211will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6212address}.
6213
6214@node Expression Section
6215@subsection The Section of an Expression
6216@cindex expression sections
6217@cindex absolute expressions
6218@cindex relative expressions
6219@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6220@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6221@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6222Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6223relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6224using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6225value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6226symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6227operations.
6228
abf4be64
AM
6229Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6230section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6231address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6232@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6233functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6234One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6235(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6236differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6237versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6238section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6239Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6240absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6241given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6242everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6243
6244In the following simple example,
252b5132 6245
7542af2a
AM
6246@smallexample
6247@group
6248SECTIONS
6249 @{
6250 . = 0x100;
6251 __executable_start = 0x100;
6252 .data :
6253 @{
6254 . = 0x10;
6255 __data_start = 0x10;
6256 *(.data)
6257 @}
6258 @dots{}
6259 @}
6260@end group
6261@end smallexample
252b5132 6262
7542af2a
AM
6263both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6264address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6265@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6266section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6267
5c3049d2
AM
6268For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6269addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6270
6271@itemize @bullet
6272@item
c05f749e
AM
6273Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6274operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6275absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6276@item
7542af2a
AM
6277Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6278relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6279and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6280@item
c05f749e
AM
6281Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6282in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6283address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6284before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6285@end itemize
6286
6287The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6288
6289@itemize @bullet
6290@item
6291An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6292@item
6293The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6294@item
9bc8bb33 6295The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6296relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6297(after above conversions) is also a number when
6298@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6299but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6300@item
6301The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6302relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6303section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6304@item
6305The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6306conversions) is an absolute address.
6307@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6308
6309You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6310to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6311create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6312section @samp{.data}:
6313@smallexample
6314SECTIONS
6315 @{
6316 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6317 @}
6318@end smallexample
6319@noindent
6320If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6321@samp{.data} section.
6322
7542af2a
AM
6323Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6324particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6325
252b5132
RH
6326@node Builtin Functions
6327@subsection Builtin Functions
6328@cindex functions in expressions
6329The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6330use in linker script expressions.
6331
6332@table @code
6333@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6334@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6335@cindex expression, absolute
6336Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6337of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6338value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6339normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6340
6341@item ADDR(@var{section})
6342@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6343@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6344Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6345script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6346the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6347@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6348@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6349the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6350@smallexample
6351@group
6352SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6353 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6354 @{
252b5132
RH
6355 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6356 @dots{}
6357 @}
6358 .output :
6359 @{
6360 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6361 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6362 @}
6363@dots{} @}
6364@end group
6365@end smallexample
6366
876f4090
NS
6367@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6368@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6369@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6370@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6371@cindex round up location counter
6372@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6373@cindex round up expression
6374@cindex align expression
6375Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6376to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6377doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6378arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6379expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6380equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6381
6382Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6383next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6384variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6385input sections:
252b5132
RH
6386@smallexample
6387@group
6388SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6389 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6390 *(.data)
6391 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6392 @}
6393@dots{} @}
6394@end group
6395@end smallexample
6396@noindent
6397The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6398a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6399a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6400of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6401
6402The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6403
362c1d1a
NS
6404@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6405@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6406@cindex section alignment
6407Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6408been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6409evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6410the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6411value in that section.
6412@smallexample
6413@group
6414SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6415 .output @{
6416 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6417 @dots{}
6418 @}
6419@dots{} @}
6420@end group
6421@end smallexample
6422
252b5132
RH
6423@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6424@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6425This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6426scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6427section.
6428
2d20f7bf
JJ
6429@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6430@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6431This is equivalent to either
6432@smallexample
6433(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6434@end smallexample
6435or
6436@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6437(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6438 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6439@end smallexample
6440@noindent
6441depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6442for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6443@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6444If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6445memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6446bytes in the on-disk file.
6447
6448This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6449any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6450@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6451be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6452running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6453that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6454page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6455
6456@noindent
6457Example:
6458@smallexample
6459 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6460@end smallexample
6461
6462@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6463@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6464This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6465evaluation purposes.
6466
6467@smallexample
6468 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6469@end smallexample
6470
a4f5ad88
JJ
6471@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6472@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6473This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6474@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6475When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6476does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6477@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6478argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6479script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6480@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6481padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6482section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6483
6484@smallexample
6485 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6486@end smallexample
6487
252b5132
RH
6488@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6489@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6490@cindex symbol defaults
6491Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6492defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6493return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6494default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6495shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6496the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6497existed, its value is preserved:
6498
6499@smallexample
6500@group
6501SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6502 .text : @{
6503 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6504 @dots{}
6505 @}
6506 @dots{}
6507@}
6508@end group
6509@end smallexample
6510
3ec57632
NC
6511@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6512@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6513Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6514
252b5132
RH
6515@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6516@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6517@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6518Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6519Section LMA}).
6520
2e53f7d6
NC
6521@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6522@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6523Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6524@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6525
252b5132
RH
6526@kindex MAX
6527@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6528Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6529
6530@kindex MIN
6531@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6532Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6533
6534@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6535@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6536@cindex unallocated address, next
6537Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6538This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6539use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6540output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6541
3ec57632
NC
6542@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6543@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6544Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6545
ba916c8a
MM
6546@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6547@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6548Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6549value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6550@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6551will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6552can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6553``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6554name.
6555
252b5132
RH
6556@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6557@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6558@cindex section size
6559Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6560been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6561evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6562@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6563@smallexample
6564@group
6565SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6566 .output @{
6567 .start = . ;
6568 @dots{}
6569 .end = . ;
6570 @}
6571 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6572 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6573@dots{} @}
6574@end group
6575@end smallexample
6576
6577@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6578@itemx sizeof_headers
6579@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6580@cindex header size
6581Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6582information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6583this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6584choose, to facilitate paging.
6585
6586@cindex not enough room for program headers
6587@cindex program headers, not enough room
6588When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6589@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6590number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6591addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6592additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6593room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6594the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6595script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6596you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6597command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6598@end table
6599
6600@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6601@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6602@cindex implicit linker scripts
6603If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6604an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6605linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6606linker will report an error.
6607
6608An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6609
6610Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6611assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6612commands.
6613
6614Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6615at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6616read. This can affect archive searching.
6617
6618@ifset GENERIC
6619@node Machine Dependent
6620@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6621
6622@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6623@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6624sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6625functionality are not listed.
6626
6627@menu
36f63dca
NC
6628@ifset H8300
6629* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6630@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6631@ifset M68HC11
6632* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6633@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6634@ifset ARM
6635* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6636@end ifset
6637@ifset HPPA
6638* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6639@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6640@ifset M68K
6641* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6642@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6643@ifset MIPS
6644* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6645@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6646@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6647* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6648@end ifset
2469cfa2 6649@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6650* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6651@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6652@ifset NDS32
6653* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6654@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6655@ifset NIOSII
6656* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6657@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6658@ifset POWERPC
6659* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6660@end ifset
6661@ifset POWERPC64
6662* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6663@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6664@ifset S/390
6665* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6666@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6667@ifset SPU
6668* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6669@end ifset
74459f0e 6670@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6671* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6672@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6673@ifset WIN32
6674* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6675@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6676@ifset XTENSA
6677* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6678@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6679@end menu
6680@end ifset
6681
252b5132
RH
6682@ifset H8300
6683@ifclear GENERIC
6684@raisesections
6685@end ifclear
6686
6687@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6688@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6689
6690@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6691For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6692you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6693
6694@table @emph
6695@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6696@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6697@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6698targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6699program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6700respectively.
6701
6702@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6703@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6704@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6705@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6706sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6707page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6708(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6709@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6710top page of memory).
1502569c 6711
81f5558e
NC
6712@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6713indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6714displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6715the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6716@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6717whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6718range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6719
1502569c 6720@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6721@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6722biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6723which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6724page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6725(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6726@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6727the top page of memory).
6728
6729@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6730@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
673132 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6732changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6733(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6734@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6735the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6736@end table
6737
6738@ifclear GENERIC
6739@lowersections
6740@end ifclear
6741@end ifset
6742
36f63dca 6743@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6744@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6745@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6746@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6747@node Renesas
6748@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6749
c2dcd04e
NC
6750@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6751H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6752options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6753@end ifset
6754@end ifclear
6755
36f63dca
NC
6756@ifset ARM
6757@ifclear GENERIC
6758@raisesections
6759@end ifclear
6760
93fd0973
SC
6761@ifset M68HC11
6762@ifclear GENERIC
6763@raisesections
6764@end ifclear
6765
6766@node M68HC11/68HC12
6767@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6768
6769@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6770
6771@subsection Linker Relaxation
6772
6773For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6774optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6775
6776@table @emph
6777@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6778@item relaxing address modes
6779@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6780targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6781program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6782respectively.
6783
6784@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6785transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6786page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6787
6788@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6789When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6790of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6791addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6792@code{bset} instructions.
6793
6794@end table
6795
6796@subsection Trampoline Generation
6797
6798@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6799@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6800For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6801call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6802will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6803trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6804case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6805point to the function trampoline.
6806
6807@ifclear GENERIC
6808@lowersections
6809@end ifclear
6810@end ifset
6811
36f63dca 6812@node ARM
3674e28a 6813@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6814
6815@cindex ARM interworking support
6816@kindex --support-old-code
6817For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6818between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6819been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6820line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6821libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6822option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6823given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6824which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6825the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6826non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6827
6828@cindex thumb entry point
6829@cindex entry point, thumb
6830@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6831The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6832@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6833But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6834branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6835executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6836
ce11ba6c
KT
6837@cindex PE import table prefixing
6838@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6839The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6840the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6841element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6842import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6843
e489d0ae
PB
6844@cindex BE8
6845@kindex --be8
6846The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6847executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6848objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6849option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6850little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6851
3674e28a
PB
6852@cindex TARGET1
6853@kindex --target1-rel
6854@kindex --target1-abs
6855The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6856@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6857or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6858and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6859
6860@cindex TARGET2
6861@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6862The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6863@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6864meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6865@table @samp
6866@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6867@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6868@item abs
6869@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6870@item got-rel
6871@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6872@end table
6873
319850b4
JB
6874@cindex FIX_V4BX
6875@kindex --fix-v4bx
6876The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6877specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6878interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6879also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6880
6881In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6882linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6883@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6884
6885In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6886relocations are ignored.
6887
845b51d6
PB
6888@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6889@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6890Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6891relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6892
6893@smallexample
6894TST rM, #1
6895MOVEQ PC, rM
6896BX Rn
6897@end smallexample
6898
6899This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6900and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6901condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6902
33bfe774
JB
6903@cindex USE_BLX
6904@kindex --use-blx
6905The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6906BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6907situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6908code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6909each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6910
6911This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6912specify it if you are using that target.
6913
c6dd86c6
JB
6914@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6915@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6916The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6917bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6918instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6919to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6920the support code can read the intended values.
6921
6922The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6923intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6924and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6925intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6926full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6927you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6928
6929If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6930enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6931@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6932mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6933vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6934@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6935
6936If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6937potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6938such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6939first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6940instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6941the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6942are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6943
2de70689
MGD
6944@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6945@kindex --fix-arm1176
6946@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6947The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6948in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6949are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6950unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6951
9d5777a3 6952Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6953Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6954http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6955
a504d23a
LA
6956@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6957@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6958
6959The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6960workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6961the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6962off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6963the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6964core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6965integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6966VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6967
6968The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6969necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6970
6971The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6972@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6973STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6974linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6975@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6976
6977If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6978potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6979such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6980replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6981branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6982then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6983
6984The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6985the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6986
6987The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6988they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6989there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6990occurs.
6991
6992The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6993PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6994large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6995cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6996occurs.
6997
bf21ed78
MS
6998@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6999@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7000The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7001warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7002enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7003linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7004using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7005not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7006
7007@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7008@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7009The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7010warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7011@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7012linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7013using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7014
726150b7
NC
7015@cindex PIC_VENEER
7016@kindex --pic-veneer
7017The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7018ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7019is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7020@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7021
7022@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7023@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7024The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7025code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7026perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7027placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7028controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7029The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7030duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7031group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7032code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7033where they should be placed.
7034
7035The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7036@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7037placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7038branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7039placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7040value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7041exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7042A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7043linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7044from the input sections.
7045
7046The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7047@samp{N = +1}.
7048
1a51c1a4
NC
7049Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7050only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7051otherwise.
7052
1db37fe6
YG
7053@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7054@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7055@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7056The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7057
7058The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7059
68fcca92
JW
7060@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7061@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7062@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7063The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7064
7065Please contact ARM for further details.
7066
1db37fe6
YG
7067@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7068@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7069@cindex Merging exidx entries
7070The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7071
7072@kindex --long-plt
7073@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7074The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7075which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7076entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7077
1f56df9d
JW
7078@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7079@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7080The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7081link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7082
4ba2ef8f
TP
7083@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7084All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7085Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7086@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7087veneers in memory.
7088
54ddd295
TP
7089@kindex --cmse-implib
7090@cindex Secure gateway import library
7091The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7092specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7093secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7094executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7095
0955507f
TP
7096@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7097@cindex Input import library
7098The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7099must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7100given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7101in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7102@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7103library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7104library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7105for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7106specified.
7107
36f63dca
NC
7108@ifclear GENERIC
7109@lowersections
7110@end ifclear
7111@end ifset
7112
7113@ifset HPPA
7114@ifclear GENERIC
7115@raisesections
7116@end ifclear
7117
7118@node HPPA ELF32
7119@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7120@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7121@kindex --multi-subspace
7122When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7123import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7124The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7125stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7126multiple sub-spaces.
7127
7128@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7129@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7130Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7131stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7132@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7133sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7134a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7135the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7136conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7137prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7138A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7139branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7140@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7141@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7142detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7143positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7144
7145Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7146single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7147create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7148large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7149
7150@ifclear GENERIC
7151@lowersections
7152@end ifclear
7153@end ifset
7154
7fb9f789
NC
7155@ifset M68K
7156@ifclear GENERIC
7157@raisesections
7158@end ifclear
7159
7160@node M68K
7161@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7162
7163@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7164@kindex --got=@var{type}
7165The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7166The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7167@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7168the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7169@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7170entries only at non-negative offsets.
7171@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7172entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7173support such GOTs.
7174@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7175output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7176file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7177files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7178
7179@ifclear GENERIC
7180@lowersections
7181@end ifclear
7182@end ifset
7183
833794fc
MR
7184@ifset MIPS
7185@ifclear GENERIC
7186@raisesections
7187@end ifclear
7188
7189@node MIPS
7190@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7191
7192@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7193@kindex --insn32
7194@kindex --no-insn32
7195The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7196microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7197in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7198used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7199or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7200including 16-bit ones where possible.
7201
8b10b0b3
MR
7202@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7203@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7204@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7205The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7206control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7207@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7208relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7209calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7210relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7211instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7212or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7213the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7214
833794fc
MR
7215@ifclear GENERIC
7216@lowersections
7217@end ifclear
7218@end ifset
7219
36f63dca
NC
7220@ifset MMIX
7221@ifclear GENERIC
7222@raisesections
7223@end ifclear
7224
7225@node MMIX
7226@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7227For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7228@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7229understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7230can translate between the two formats.
7231
7232There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7233Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7234registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7235equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7236@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7237global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7238this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7239symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7240
7a2de473
HPN
7241Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7242@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7243The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7244of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7245
7246Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7247are left out from an mmo file.
7248
7249@ifclear GENERIC
7250@lowersections
7251@end ifclear
7252@end ifset
7253
7254@ifset MSP430
7255@ifclear GENERIC
7256@raisesections
7257@end ifclear
7258
7259@node MSP430
7260@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7261For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7262will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7263just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7264
7265@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7266The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7267
7268@table @code
7269@item @samp{.vectors}
7270Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7271
7272@item @samp{.bootloader}
7273Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7274in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7275
7276@item @samp{.infomem}
7277Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7278this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7279
c0065db7 7280@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7281This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7282in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7283
7284@item @samp{.noinit}
7285Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7286
c0065db7 7287The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7288@end table
7289
7ef3addb
JL
7290@table @option
7291@cindex MSP430 Options
7292@kindex --code-region
7293@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7294This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7295argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7296using this option.
7297
7298@kindex --data-region
7299@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7300This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7301[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7302for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7303
7304@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7305@item --disable-sec-transformation
7306Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7307and @code{--data-region} options.
7308This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7309wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7310not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7311@end table
7312
36f63dca
NC
7313@ifclear GENERIC
7314@lowersections
7315@end ifclear
7316@end ifset
7317
35c08157
KLC
7318@ifset NDS32
7319@ifclear GENERIC
7320@raisesections
7321@end ifclear
7322
7323@node NDS32
7324@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7325@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7326For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7327relaxes objects according to these options.
7328
7329@table @code
7330@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7331Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7332
7333@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7334Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7335
7336@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7337Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7338
7339@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7340Export the EX9 table after linking.
7341
7342@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7343Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7344
7345@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7346Update the existing EX9 table.
7347
7348@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7349Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7350
7351@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7352Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7353
7354@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7355Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7356
7357@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7358Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7359@end table
7360
7361@ifclear GENERIC
7362@lowersections
7363@end ifclear
7364@end ifset
7365
78058a5e
SL
7366@ifset NIOSII
7367@ifclear GENERIC
7368@raisesections
7369@end ifclear
7370
7371@node Nios II
7372@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7373@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7374@kindex --relax on Nios II
7375
7376Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7377transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7378which may result in @command{ld} giving
7379@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7380The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7381trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7382outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7383trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7384be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7385larger than 256MB.
7386
7387The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7388is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7389@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7390locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7391source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7392register as a temporary.
7393
7394Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7395relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7396option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7397
7398@ifclear GENERIC
7399@lowersections
7400@end ifclear
7401@end ifset
7402
2a60a7a8
AM
7403@ifset POWERPC
7404@ifclear GENERIC
7405@raisesections
7406@end ifclear
7407
7408@node PowerPC ELF32
7409@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7410@cindex PowerPC long branches
7411@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7412Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7413displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7414@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7415@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7416the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7417section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7418section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7419@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7420both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7421considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7422
7423@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7424@table @option
7425@cindex PowerPC PLT
7426@kindex --bss-plt
7427@item --bss-plt
7428Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7429generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7430the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7431writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7432@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7433PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7434compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7435BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7436
016687f8
AM
7437@kindex --secure-plt
7438@item --secure-plt
7439@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7440@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7441when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7442layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7443style BSS PLT.
7444
2a60a7a8
AM
7445@cindex PowerPC GOT
7446@kindex --sdata-got
7447@item --sdata-got
7448The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7449sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7450@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7451section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7452@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7453@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7454@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7455@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7456PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7457pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7458GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7459really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7460
7461@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7462@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7463@item --emit-stub-syms
7464This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7465symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7466
7467@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7468@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7469@item --no-tls-optimize
7470PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7471sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7472disable the optimization.
7473@end table
7474
7475@ifclear GENERIC
7476@lowersections
7477@end ifclear
7478@end ifset
7479
7480@ifset POWERPC64
7481@ifclear GENERIC
7482@raisesections
7483@end ifclear
7484
7485@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7486@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7487
7488@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7489@table @option
7490@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7491@kindex --stub-group-size
7492@item --stub-group-size
7493Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7494by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7495@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7496sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7497a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7498the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7499conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7500prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7501A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7502branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7503@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7504@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7505detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7506positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7507
7508Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7509single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7510create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7511large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7512
7513@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7514@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7515@item --emit-stub-syms
7516This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7517symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7518
7519@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7520@kindex --dotsyms
7521@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7522@item --dotsyms
7523@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7524These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7525in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7526function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7527code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7528properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7529to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7530@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7531dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7532feature.
7533
7ae4ea7d
AM
7534@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7535@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7536@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7537@item --save-restore-funcs
7538@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7539These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7540provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7541@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7542function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7543link.
7544
2a60a7a8
AM
7545@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7546@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7547@item --no-tls-optimize
7548PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7549sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7550disable the optimization.
7551
7c9cf415
AM
7552@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7553@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7554@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7555@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7556@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7557These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7558stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7559an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7560@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7561stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7562option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7563Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7564slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7565application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7566normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7567
2a60a7a8
AM
7568@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7569@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7570@item --no-opd-optimize
7571PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7572corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7573the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7574Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7575
7576@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7577@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7578@item --non-overlapping-opd
7579Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7580@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7581the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7582entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7583
7584@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7585@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7586@item --no-toc-optimize
7587PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7588entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7589reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7590marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7591marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7592relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7593unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7594reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7595discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7596reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7597code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7598optimization.
7599
7600@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7601@kindex --no-multi-toc
7602@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7603If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7604@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7605where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7606entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7607total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7608grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7609TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7610calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7611help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
761264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7613Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7614
7615@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7616@kindex --no-toc-sort
7617@item --no-toc-sort
7618By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7619happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7620placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7621with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7622referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7623@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7624results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7625off this feature.
7626
7627@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7628@kindex --plt-align
7629@kindex --no-plt-align
7630@item --plt-align
7631@itemx --no-plt-align
7632Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7633aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7634boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7635specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7636specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7637if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7638PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7639
7640@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7641@kindex --plt-static-chain
7642@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7643@item --plt-static-chain
7644@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7645Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7646chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7647chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7648
7649@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7650@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7651@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7652@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7653@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7654With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7655lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7656another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7657order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7658memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7659barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7660looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7661seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7662default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7663
7664@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7665@kindex --plt-localentry
7666@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7667@item --plt-localentry
7668@itemx --no-localentry
7669ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7670ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7671(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7672Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7673or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7674functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7675in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7676interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7677including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7678to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7679complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7680care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7681@end table
7682
7683@ifclear GENERIC
7684@lowersections
7685@end ifclear
7686@end ifset
7687
b4cbbe8f
AK
7688@ifset S/390
7689@ifclear GENERIC
7690@raisesections
7691@end ifclear
7692
7693@node S/390 ELF
7694@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7695
7696@cindex S/390 ELF options
7697@table @option
7698
7699@cindex S/390
7700@kindex --s390-pgste
7701@item --s390-pgste
7702This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7703segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7704binaries marked that way.
7705@end table
7706
7707@ifclear GENERIC
7708@lowersections
7709@end ifclear
7710@end ifset
7711
49fa1e15
AM
7712@ifset SPU
7713@ifclear GENERIC
7714@raisesections
7715@end ifclear
7716
7717@node SPU ELF
7718@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7719
7720@cindex SPU ELF options
7721@table @option
7722
7723@cindex SPU plugins
7724@kindex --plugin
7725@item --plugin
7726This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7727
7728@cindex SPU overlays
7729@kindex --no-overlays
7730@item --no-overlays
7731Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7732regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7733@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7734turns off all this special overlay handling.
7735
7736@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7737@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7738@item --emit-stub-syms
7739This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7740symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7741
7742@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7743@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7744@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7745This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7746function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7747on calls to non-overlay regions.
7748
7749@cindex SPU local store size
7750@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7751@item --local-store=lo:hi
7752@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7753the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7754range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7755
c0065db7 7756@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7757@kindex --stack-analysis
7758@item --stack-analysis
7759SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7760unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7761under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7762@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7763@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7764determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7765for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7766for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7767for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7768find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7769and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7770under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7771dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7772is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7773and calls will be given.
7774
c0065db7 7775@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7776@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7777@item --emit-stack-syms
7778This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7779in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7780These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7781functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7782functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7783such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7784The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7785@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7786@end table
7787
7788@ifclear GENERIC
7789@lowersections
7790@end ifclear
7791@end ifset
7792
36f63dca
NC
7793@ifset TICOFF
7794@ifclear GENERIC
7795@raisesections
7796@end ifclear
7797
7798@node TI COFF
7799@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7800@cindex TI COFF versions
7801@kindex --format=@var{version}
7802The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7803TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7804also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7805format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7806header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7807
7808@ifclear GENERIC
7809@lowersections
7810@end ifclear
7811@end ifset
7812
2ca22b03
NC
7813@ifset WIN32
7814@ifclear GENERIC
7815@raisesections
7816@end ifclear
7817
7818@node WIN32
7819@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7820
c0065db7 7821This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7822See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7823command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7824
7825@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7826@cindex import libraries
7827@item import libraries
69da35b5 7828The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7829libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7830regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7831archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7832support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7833@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7834
c0065db7
RM
7835@item exporting DLL symbols
7836@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7837The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7838
7839@table @emph
7840@item using auto-export functionality
7841@cindex using auto-export functionality
7842By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7843which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7844
0a5d968e
NC
7845@itemize
7846@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7847@item --exclude-symbols
7848@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7849@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7850@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7851@end itemize
7852
09e2aba4
DK
7853When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7854(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7855symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7856often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7857private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7858options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7859exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7860final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7861
7862If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7863command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7864if either of the following are true:
7865
7866@itemize
7867@item A DEF file is used.
7868@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7869@end itemize
dc8465bf 7870
c0065db7
RM
7871@item using a DEF file
7872@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7873Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7874an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7875exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7876name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7877command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7878
7879@example
7880gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7881@end example
7882
0a5d968e
NC
7883Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7884@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7885
dc8465bf
NC
7886Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7887
7888@example
4b5bd4e7 7889LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7890
7891EXPORTS
7892foo
7893bar
7894_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7895another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7896var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7897doo = foo == foo2
7898eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7899@end example
dc8465bf 7900
7fcab871 7901This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7902symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7903alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7904by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7905@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7906@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7907export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7908in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7909symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7910
6b31ad16
DS
7911The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7912name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7913the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7914
b45619c0
NC
7915When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7916library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7917@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7918executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7919
7920With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7921specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7922non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7923
7924If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7925or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7926filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7927
4b5bd4e7
DS
7928The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7929
7930@example
7931EXPORTS
7932 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7933 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7934 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7935@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7936
7937Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7938@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7939@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7940@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7941Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7942@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7943string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7944
7945The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7946
7947@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7948will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7949by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7950linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7951library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7952
7953@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7954The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7955the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7956@code{*_imp__foo}).
7957
7958@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7959well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7960read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7961variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7962the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7963extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7964application will behave unexpectedly.
7965
7966@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7967it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7968symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7969API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7970the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7971
4b5bd4e7
DS
7972See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7973other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7974
7975@cindex creating a DEF file
7976While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 7977with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7978
7979@item Using decorations
7980@cindex Using decorations
7981Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7982itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7983declared as:
7984
7985@example
7986__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7987__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7988@end example
7989
7990All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7991any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7992this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7993the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7994
7995Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7996decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7997instead:
7998
7999@example
8000__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8001__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8002@end example
8003
c0065db7
RM
8004This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8005when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8006variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8007code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8008of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8009omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8010@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8011information.
c0065db7 8012@end table
dc8465bf 8013
2ca22b03
NC
8014@cindex automatic data imports
8015@item automatic data imports
8016The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8017by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8018compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8019issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8020code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8021c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8022initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8023decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8024platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8025command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8026The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8027suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8028trigger the feature's use.
8029
c0065db7 8030auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8031additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8032
c0065db7 8033"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8034documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8035
c0065db7
RM
8036The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8037occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8038One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8039below.
8040
8041@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8042For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8043object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8044offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8045field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8046in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8047without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8048The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8049references.
8050
c0065db7
RM
8051The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8052be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8053themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8054runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8055compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8056support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8057run without error on an older system.
8058
c0065db7
RM
8059@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8060enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8061
8062@cindex direct linking to a dll
8063@item direct linking to a dll
8064The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8065including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8066libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8067traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8068libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8069function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8070though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8071storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8072tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8073large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8074
c0065db7 8075Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8076@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8077of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8078perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8079select the dll instead of an import library.
8080
2ca22b03 8081
69da35b5
NC
8082For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8083to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8084
8085@example
45e948fe
NC
8086libxxx.dll.a
8087xxx.dll.a
8088libxxx.a
8089xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8090libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8091cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8092libxxx.dll
8093xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8094@end example
8095
69da35b5
NC
8096before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8097
c0065db7
RM
8098(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8099where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8100@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8101file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8102@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8103
c0065db7
RM
8104Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8105@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8106was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8107various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8108could coexist on the same machine.
8109
2ca22b03
NC
8110The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8111applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8112libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8113
8114@example
8115bin/
8116 cygxxx.dll
8117lib/
8118 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8119 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8120@end example
8121
c0065db7
RM
8122Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8123done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8124
81251. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8126@example
8127gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8128@end example
2ca22b03 8129
69da35b5
NC
8130However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8131(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8132@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8133not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8134
2ca22b03
NC
81352. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8136directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8137should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8138making the app/dll.
8139
8140@example
8141ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8142@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8143
8144Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8145
8146@example
8147gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8148@end example
69da35b5
NC
8149
8150This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8151perfectly legal
8152
8153@example
8154bin/
8155 cygxxx-5.dll
8156lib/
c0065db7 8157 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8158@end example
8159
dc8465bf 8160Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8161even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8162@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8163
8164Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8165wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8166
81671. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8168work with auto-imported data.
8169
dc8465bf
NC
81702. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8171import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8172symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8173for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8174possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8175
45e948fe
NC
81763. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8177critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8178in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8179stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8180
69da35b5 8181So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8182true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8183a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8184binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8185massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8186requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8187will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8188
c0065db7 8189@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8190@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8191@item adding additional names
8192Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8193A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8194exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8195when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8196import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8197
c0065db7 8198@example
dc8465bf
NC
8199LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8200
8201EXPORTS
c0065db7 8202foo
dc8465bf 8203_foo = foo
c0065db7 8204@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8205
8206The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8207
8208Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8209source code using the "weak" attribute:
8210
c0065db7
RM
8211@example
8212void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8213void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8214@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8215
8216See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8217symbols.
8218
8219@item renaming symbols
8220Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8221kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8222@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8223DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8224created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8225
c0065db7 8226@example
dc8465bf
NC
8227LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8228
8229EXPORTS
8230_foo = foo
c0065db7 8231@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8232
8233The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8234@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8235@end table
dc8465bf 8236
0a5d968e 8237Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8238unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8239If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8240@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8241that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8242@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8243renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8244to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8245the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8246In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8247which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8248
8249@cindex weak externals
8250@item weak externals
8251The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8252weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8253defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8254are three variants of weak externals:
8255@itemize
8256@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8257called lazy externals.
8258@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8259This form is not presently implemented.
8260@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8261implemented.
8262@end itemize
8263As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8264are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8265uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8266
8267@cindex aligned common symbols
8268@item aligned common symbols
8269As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8270desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8271the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8272carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8273by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8274tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8275but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8276warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8277
2ca22b03
NC
8278@end table
8279
8280@ifclear GENERIC
8281@lowersections
8282@end ifclear
8283@end ifset
8284
e0001a05
NC
8285@ifset XTENSA
8286@ifclear GENERIC
8287@raisesections
8288@end ifclear
8289
8290@node Xtensa
8291@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8292
8293@cindex Xtensa processors
8294The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8295@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8296specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8297keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8298example, with the command:
8299
8300@smallexample
8301SECTIONS
8302@{
8303 .text : @{
8304 *(.literal .text)
8305 @}
8306@}
8307@end smallexample
8308
8309@noindent
8310@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8311and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8312literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8313interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8314group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8315files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8316and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8317
43cd72b9 8318@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8319@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8320Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8321provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8322is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8323literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8324will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8325location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8326the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8327unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8328@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8329range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8330
8331For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8332to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8333instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8334instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8335instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8336@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8337hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8338By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8339switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8340density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8341instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8342performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8343linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8344a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8345
8346The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8347control the linker:
8348
8349@cindex Xtensa options
8350@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8351@item --size-opt
8352When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8353more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8354no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8355alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8356preserve the correctness of the code.
8357@end table
e0001a05
NC
8358
8359@ifclear GENERIC
8360@lowersections
8361@end ifclear
8362@end ifset
8363
252b5132
RH
8364@ifclear SingleFormat
8365@node BFD
8366@chapter BFD
8367
8368@cindex back end
8369@cindex object file management
8370@cindex object formats available
8371@kindex objdump -i
8372The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8373These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8374object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8375format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8376it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8377associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8378object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8379(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8380list all the formats available for your configuration.
8381
8382@cindex BFD requirements
8383@cindex requirements for BFD
8384As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8385several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8386BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8387formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8388been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8389BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8390may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8391
8392One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8393mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8394useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8395conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8396
8397@menu
8398* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8399@end menu
8400
8401@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8402@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8403@cindex opening object files
8404@include bfdsumm.texi
8405@end ifclear
8406
8407@node Reporting Bugs
8408@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8409@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8410@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8411
ff5dcc92 8412Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8413
8414Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8415it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8416to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8417work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8418@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8419
8420In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8421information that enables us to fix the bug.
8422
8423@menu
8424* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8425* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8426@end menu
8427
8428@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8429@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8430@cindex bug criteria
8431
8432If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8433
8434@itemize @bullet
8435@cindex fatal signal
8436@cindex linker crash
8437@cindex crash of linker
8438@item
8439If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8440@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8441
8442@cindex error on valid input
8443@item
ff5dcc92 8444If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8445
8446@cindex invalid input
8447@item
ff5dcc92 8448If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8449may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8450object files are correct.
8451
8452@item
8453If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8454improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8455@end itemize
8456
8457@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8458@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8459@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8460@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8461
8462A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8463products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8464recommend you contact that organization first.
8465
8466You can find contact information for many support companies and
8467individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8468distribution.
8469
ad22bfe8 8470@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8471Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8472@value{BUGURL}.
8473@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8474
8475The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8476@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8477fact or leave it out, state it!
8478
8479Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8480problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8481assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8482matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8483the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8484location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8485were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8486into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8487specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8488and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8489
8490Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8491the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8492on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8493
8494Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8495bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8496respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8497You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8498
8499To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8500
8501@itemize @bullet
8502@item
ff5dcc92 8503The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8504the @samp{--version} argument.
8505
8506Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8507the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8508
8509@item
ff5dcc92 8510Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8511patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8512
8513@item
8514The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8515version number.
8516
8517@item
ff5dcc92 8518What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8519``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8520
8521@item
8522The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8523observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8524list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8525sufficient.
8526
8527If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8528and then we might not encounter the bug.
8529
8530@item
8531A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8532bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8533provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8534bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8535state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8536requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8537we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8538attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8539
8540If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8541@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8542object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8543@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8544how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8545
8546@item
8547A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8548incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8549
ff5dcc92 8550Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8551will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8552not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8553a chance to make a mistake.
8554
8555Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8556say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8557copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8558C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8559and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8560fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8561you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8562any conclusion from our observations.
8563
8564@item
ff5dcc92 8565If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8566diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8567@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8568If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8569context, not by line number.
8570
8571The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8572sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8573@end itemize
8574
8575Here are some things that are not necessary:
8576
8577@itemize @bullet
8578@item
8579A description of the envelope of the bug.
8580
8581Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8582which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8583changes will not affect it.
8584
8585This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8586will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8587with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8588We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8589
8590Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8591of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8592output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8593less time, and so on.
8594
8595However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8596report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8597
8598@item
8599A patch for the bug.
8600
8601A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8602the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8603a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8604to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8605
ff5dcc92 8606Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8607construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8608through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8609able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8610fixed.
8611
8612And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8613patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8614help us to understand.
8615
8616@item
8617A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8618
8619Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8620things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8621@end itemize
8622
8623@node MRI
8624@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8625@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8626To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8627linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8628alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8629described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8630simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8631@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8632linker commands; these commands are described here.
8633
8634In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8635file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8636features to make use of them.
8637
8638You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8639@samp{-c} command-line option.
8640
8641Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8642command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8643blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8644MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8645issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8646
8647Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8648
8649You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8650lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8651The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8652
8653@table @code
8654@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8655@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8656@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8657Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8658the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8659@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8660your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8661script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8662commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8663input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8664@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8665
8666@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8667@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8668Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8669in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8670
8671@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8672
8673@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8674@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8675Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8676@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8677
8678@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8679@item BASE @var{expression}
8680Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8681absolute addresses) in the output file.
8682
8683@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8684@item CHIP @var{expression}
8685@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8686This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8687
8688@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8689@item END
8690This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8691
8692@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8693@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8694Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8695language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8696
8697@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8698@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8699Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8700@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8701
8702The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8703same line, with no change in its effect.
8704
8705@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8706@item LOAD @var{filename}
8707@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8708Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8709same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8710command line.
8711
8712@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8713@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8714@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8715MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8716option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8717
8718@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8719@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8720@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8721Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8722order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8723script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8724sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8725file, in the order specified.
8726
8727@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8728@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8729@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8730@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8731Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8732@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8733
8734@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8735@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8736@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8737@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8738You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8739specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8740If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8741@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8742@end table
8743
793c5807
NC
8744@node GNU Free Documentation License
8745@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8746@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8747
370b66a1
CD
8748@node LD Index
8749@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8750
8751@printindex cp
8752
8753@tex
7ca01ed9 8754% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8755% meantime:
8756\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8757\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8758\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8759\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8760\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8761\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8762\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8763\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8764\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8765% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8766@end tex
8767
252b5132 8768@bye
This page took 1.435752 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.